Revit MEP 2010

Imperial Tutorial

March 2009

©

2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA (design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What is in the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2

Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using the Revit MEP User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Parts of the Revit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 3

Getting Started with MEP Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating an MEP Project . . . . . . . . . . Linking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying a View Template . Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 30 . 34 . 35 . 35 . 36 . 39 . 40

Creating a Mechanical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Placing a Space in an Open Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

v

Placing a Multi-Level Space . . . . . . . Viewing Zones in the System Browser . . Creating Zones on a Single Level . . . . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels . . . Working with the Analytical Model . . . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads . Creating a Zone Color Scheme . . . . . Creating an Airflow Schedule . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 56 . 59 . 60 . 62 . 64 . 69 . 72 . 75

Chapter 5

Designing Mechanical Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placing Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . . 85 . . 92 . . 94 . 102

Chapter 6

Designing a Mechanical Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adding Mechanical Equipment . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout . . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout . Adding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the System . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 . 114 . 119 . 128 . 142 . 146 . 149 . 151

Creating an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Specifying Electrical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Defining Required Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Creating Color Fills and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Chapter 8

Designing an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Switch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 . 177 . 183 . 193 . 200 . 204 . 207 . 211 . 213 . 214

Creating a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 10

Designing a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Creating a Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

vi | Contents

Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Creating the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Creating the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Specifying Pipe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Determining Zone Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12

Designing a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Adding Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Adding Vertical Supply Piping . . . . . . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 284 . 289 . 294 . 299

Documenting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 . 308 . 311 . 315

Chapter 14

Working with Annotations and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Chapter 15

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail . Creating Detail Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail . . . . . . . . Drafting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a CAD Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 . 338 . 348 . 353 . 364

Contents | vii

viii .

Finally.Introduction In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to access the tutorial training files. You also learn how to use the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 user interface to perform common tasks. you learn how to create and set up an MEP project. 1 .

2 .

The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. You complete the following phases of design: ■ ■ ■ Import the architectural floor plan in either a 2D (DWG) or a 3D (RVT) format. Add basic MEP elements. The technical training facility you design was a product of a design competition in Munich. This building is also used as the model in the Revit® Architecture and Revit® Structure 2010 tutorials. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP. Add more detailed modelling elements. including an overview of the building information model that you design in the tutorials. Germany. and plumbing engineering workflows. What is in the Tutorials In these tutorials. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. such as mechanical equipment. and where to find the training files required to complete the exercises. and piping. such as duct. electrical. and plumbing fixtures. electrical panels. fixtures. How the tutorials are organized The tutorials are designed to follow the typical mechanical. 3 . you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit MEP.Using the Tutorials 1 This lesson provides information on how to get started with the Revit® MEP 2010 tutorials.

On the Contents tab. and sheets to document the project. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials. The tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system. you can complete any exercise without first completing the preceding exercises. it is recommended that you begin each exercise by opening the training provided. is located and accessed in the training files location. Metric file names have an _m suffix. For example. 4 | Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . So. when you add ductwork. In this exercise. When you open a training file. Imperial file names have an _i suffix. annotations. NOTE Depending on your installation. but only enough of a system to learn how to use the tools and options in the product. Open a training file 1 Click ➤ Open. you can choose to save your work. The training files include a starting point for each tutorial exercise. however. When you install the training files as instructed. all content used in the tutorials is installed in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files. After completing each exercise. Each training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. Use the training files A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. These elements enhance the exercises you complete. Create schedules. elements such as additional ductwork and equipment are incorporated into subsequent training files. The tutorial exercises are designed to be basic and brief. views. and tags. Contact your CAD manager for more information. Training files are grouped into 2 folders within the Training folder: ■ ■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. they are copied to the default location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2010\Training. You do not design entire systems. such as templates and families. Create detail views. Metric: files for users working with metric units.■ ■ ■ Analyze systems and refine MEP elements. the exercises and lessons can be completed in any order. and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. you only draw the duct in one wing of the building. as well as how to open and save them. the tutorials are grouped and presented in a recommended order for optimal learning. However. to provide a richer and more finished design. you may notice that MEP elements are included that were not specifically added in an exercise. Accessing Training Files Training files are Revit MEP projects. Locate the training files The Tutorials option on the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 Help menu provides a link to the installation website for the tutorial content and training files. you learn where the training files are located. templates. your Training folder may be in a different location. For example.

verify that Project Files (*.rvt and make changes. double-click Imperial or Metric. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Click a file type to display the Open dialog for the specified file type. A training file is provided as a starting point for each exercise. click ➤ Save As. If you click the arrow to the right of the Open option. and click the Training Files icon. 3 In the right pane. 8 If you have made changes.rvt. depending on the instructions in the tutorial. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name. For example. if you open settings. and you can open any supported file type.rvt) is selected. you should save this file with a new name such as settings_modified. scroll down.NOTE If you click the word Open in the menu. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ For Save in. the Open dialog displays. For Files of type. you are prompted to save the changes. enter the new file name. and click Save. 4 Click the training file name. select the folder in which to save the new file. For File name. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. a list of file types displays. ■ ■ Close a training file 7 Click ➤ Close. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. NOTE You are not required to save your work in a training file. and click Open. Accessing Training Files | 5 . You may close the file with or without saving changes.

6 .

In the Revit MEP model. If the length of the elevation is changed. ■ ■ 7 . and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. every drawing sheet. drawings. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. and phases when you need it. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. and schedules required for a building project. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the design that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. If you move the partition.Understanding the Basics 2 In this lesson. sections. you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. the hierarchy of elements. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. In this case. the floor or roof remains connected. the door retains this relationship to the partition. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. scope. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. 2D and 3D view. and plans. You learn the terminology. quantities. As you work in drawing and schedule views. schedules. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. the parameter is one of association or connection. Understanding the Concepts What is Autodesk Revit MEP 2010? The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. hence. drawing sheets. In this case. the operation of the software is parametric. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database.

levels. tags. boilers. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. ■ 8 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . ducts. For example. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. sprinklers. For example. and keynotes are annotation elements. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. dimensions. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. boilers. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. Examples include detail lines. and electrical panels. walls and ceilings are hosts. For example. and reference planes are datum elements. sinks. They help to describe or document the design. For example. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. ducts. dimensions. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. sprinklers. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building.How does Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. Datum elements help to define project context. They display in relevant views of the design. Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. and 2D detail components. For example. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. grids. sinks. When you change something. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. tags. filled regions. For example. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. and electrical panels.

the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. first floor. from geometry to construction data. Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. for example. To place levels. Most often. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. schedules. you do nothing to establish these relationships. In other cases. In Revit MEP.This implementation provides flexibility for designers. programming is not required. The project file contains all information for the building design. However. For example. Understanding the Concepts | 9 . Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. and ceilings. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. you must be in a section or elevation view. floors. North . you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. and types. section views. Understanding Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories. categories of model elements include mechanical equipment and air terminals. views of the project. by locking a dimension or aligning to walls. you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. some terms are unique to Revit MEP. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. If you can draw. Categories of annotation elements include tags and symbols. and drawings of the design. or bottom of foundation. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. By using a single project file. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. top of wall. families. Often.Elevation View Element: When creating a project. you can explicitly control them. industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. Project: In Revit MEP. and so forth). elevation views. This information includes components used to design the model. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. such as roofs.

although the pendant lights that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. Using the Revit MEP User Interface Revit MEP is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft® Windows operating system. a lighting fixture could be considered one family. 10 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the design (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). Type: Each family can have several types. System families include ducts. pipes. There are 3 kinds of families: ■ Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. A type can also be a style. you can set the ribbon to one of the three display settings for optimum use of the interface. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. With a few clicks. and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work. Unlike system and standard component families. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. you can create different types of fittings with different compositions. For example. you cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. and wires. ■ Because in-place families are intended for limited use in a project. However. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). For example. ■ ■ In-place families are custom families that you create in the context of a project. hiding. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. and you can place copies of the same in-place family element in your projects. System families can be transferred between projects. Then experiment with them. or layer the views to see only the one on top. You can also display several project views at one time. showing. such as a 30” X 42” title block. Parts of the Revit Interface The Revit MEP interface is designed to simplify your workflow. you can change the interface to better support the way that you work.Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. For example. Create an in-place family when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain one of more relationships to other project geometry. each in-place family contains only a single type. and similar graphical representation. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. the behavior of a plumbing fitting is predefined in the system. Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks. A type can be a specific size of a family. Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the Revit interface. ■ ■ ■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. You can create multiple in-place families in your projects. identical use.

Customize the ribbon by changing the panel order. you can click the top (or left) side to access the tool you probably use most often. Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels. or drag the panel back to its original ribbon tab. Minimize to Panel Tiles: Shows tab and panel labels. To move panels: ■ ■ Click a panel label and drag the panel to a desired place on the ribbon. click the Return Panels to Ribbon button. Parts of the Revit Interface | 11 . To minimize the ribbon 1 Click (Show Full Ribbon) to the right of the ribbon tabs. Click the other side to expose a list of other related tools. 2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options: ■ ■ ■ Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon. and provides all the tools necessary to create your file. To return the panel to the ribbon. The ribbon can be minimized for maximum use of the drawing area. Ribbon Tabs and Panels TIP When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides. Click a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon to the desktop. or moving a panel off the ribbon to your desktop.Ribbon Overview The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file.

The Add-Ins tab is enabled only when a third-party tool is installed. data and systems. and CAD files. and for switching views.. tools used for adding 2D information to a design. architect-specific tools. project and system parameters. tools used for running analysis on the current design. Create (family files only) Insert Annotate Modify Analyze Architect Collaborate View Manage Add-Ins 12 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . many of the tools you need to create the MEP design. select the tool first.. tools used for editing existing elements. There are a number of button types on the ribbon Ribbon Tab Home Includes commands for. tools to add and manage secondary items such as raster images. and settings.Examples of button that can be clicked on two sides The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain. tools used for managing and modifying the current view. tools for collaboration with internal and external project team members. third-party tools used with Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. When working on the Modify tab. then select what you want to modify. many of the tools you need to create and modify a family of elements.

when adding duct. provides requested information. application button application menu Quick Access toolbar InfoCenter Status Bar Parts of the Revit Interface | 13 . closes the application menu (double-click). a special contextual ribbon tab displays that contains a set of tools that relate only to the context of the command. provides access to common tools. The application frame consists of five main areas described in the following table: Application Window Tool Description opens the application menu (single -click). For example. Application Frame Overview The application frame contains tools and provides feedback to help you manage your Revit MEP projects. To keep a panel expanded. an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel. A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom of a panel opens a dialog. a Place Duct contextual tab displays that has three panels: ■ ■ ■ Selection: contains the Modify command. Placement Tools: contains the placement tools necessary for placing and connecting duct. Element: contains Element Properties and the Type Selector. Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you execute certain commands or select an element. displays frequently used tools. click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel.Expanded Panels A drop-down arrow at the bottom of a panel indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional tools and controls. displays information related to the current state of a Revit operation. This contextual ribbon tab closes once you end the command. By default.

(Export) On the application menu. (Save As) export the current drawing. Click to access the application menu and perform the following actions: to. (Save) save the current drawing with a new name. select a file to open... click. (New) 14 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .The Application Menu The application menu provides access to many common file actions and also allows you to manage your files using more advanced commands. select a template and create a new drawing. Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu. (Open) save the current drawing. such as Export and Publish. NOTE Revit MEP options are set from Options on the application menu...

. reinstates the last cancelled action and displays a list of all reinstated actions performed during the session. annotation. or template file. cancels the last action by default and displays a list of all actions taken during the session. To enable or disable a tool item. enters selection mode and ends the current operation. NOTE New displays on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. annotation. but is not enabled by default. publish the current project.. click. click next to it on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. to. (Licensing) close the file. and Walkthrough. Camera. synchronizes a local file with that on the central server. provides views including Default 3D. (Save) (Undo) (Redo) (Modify) (Synchronize and Modify Settings) (3D View) (Customize Quick Access Toolbar) Parts of the Revit Interface | 15 . family. customizes the items displayed on the Quick Access toolbar. (Publish) print the current drawing. (Close) Using the Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar contains the following items by default: Quick Access Toolbar Item (Open) Description opens a project. (Print) access product and license information.. saves a current project. family.. or template file.On the application menu.

Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom of the Revit MEP application frame. or the Family Editor. or View Graphics panels persist on the toolbar for that mode. The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon. when you switch to another editing mode. 16 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Clipboard. When you are using a command. workshared components. the Status Bar displays the name of the family and type. Clear the Status Bar check mark. items that are added to the Quick Access toolbar from the Create. repeat the command. displaying the same information. Modify. Starting with the most recent command. This displays the command history in a list. Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components. When you are highlighting an element or component. Click Show Below the Ribbon on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar to change the display setting. Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable. the left side of the Status Bar provides tips or hints on what to do. Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option.To undo or redo a series of operations. Filter button: Displays how many elements are selected and refines the element categories selected in a view. Getting Hints About What to Do Next If you start a command (such as Rotate) and are not sure what to do next. click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down. Group. However. Several other controls appear on the right side of the Status Bar ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Press & Drag: Allows you to click and drag an element without it selecting first. While in an edit mode (such as Modify Electrical Fixtures). NOTE There are some tools on contextual tabs that cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar. To show the Status Bar again. To hide the Status Bar. It often displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command. a tool tip appears next to the cursor. check the Status Bar. In addition. these items do not display and need to be re-added to the Quick Access toolbar. you can select any number of previous commands to include in the Undo or Redo operation. click the drop-down to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons.

To cancel or exit the current command. View Control Bar The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit window above the Status Bar. Options Bar The Options Bar is located below the ribbon. select one or more elements of the same category. When you place an element in a drawing. click (Modify). Type Selector The Type Selector is located on the Element panel for the currently invoked tool. Then use the Type Selector to select the desired type. To change existing elements to a different type. On the Quick Access toolbar. do either of the following: ■ ■ Press ESC twice. Its contents change depending on the current function or selected elements. for example. including the following: Parts of the Revit Interface | 17 . use the Type Selector to specify the type of element to add. It provides quick access to functions that affect the drawing area. Its contents change depending on the current command or selected element. Place a Wall.

Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the MEP design in the window. Crop View On/Off Show/Hide Crop Region Temporary Hide/Isolate Reveal Hidden Elements Modifying the View In this exercise. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 1 Click ➤ Open.) The zoom menu lists the zoom options. After you are familiar with these tasks. 18 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . In the following steps. For example.rvt. (The Navigation bar is located in the top-right corner of the view. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. you learn how to modify the views within your Revit MEP project. Zoom the view In the tutorials. There are several ways to access zoom options. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click Navigation bar ➤ Zoom In Region drop-down to display the zoom menu. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or floor plan in the view.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Scale Detail Level Model Graphics Style Shadows On/Off Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. click Training Files.

click . the view zooms in on the selected area. on the Navigation bar. The view of the MEP design is sized to fit the available window. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. When you release the mouse button. 8 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. If you do not have a wheel mouse. Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. To modify or add snap increments. use a zoom menu command to zoom out.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the currently-selected zoom command. In the drawing area. 9 To display SteeringWheels. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. 5 Click Zoom To Fit. this is referred to as a crossing selection. NOTE As you zoom in and out. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again. Modifying the View | 19 . SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. the view zooms out from the mechanical piping design. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. and enter the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. 6 Click in the drawing area. 7 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. NOTE If the Navigation bar is not currently displayed click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and select Navigation bar.

10 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. As you move the mouse. moving the wheel to the desired location. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. Reorient the view You can use the View Cube in 3D views to spin the design or reorient the view 15 Place the mouse cursor over the South compass portion of the ViewCube to highlight the direction indicator. ➤ Options. press F1 while the steering wheel is displayed. 14 To exit the wheel. 13 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. and then using the Zoom tool again. and click tin the Options dialog. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. For more information about SteeringWheels. click 16 Click the Top compass direction indicator to switch to a Top view of the design. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button.The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. To define settings for SteeringWheels. click the SteeringWheels tab. Click and drag to orbit the design. 20 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . press ESC. 12 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. 11 Click and hold the mouse button.

Performing Common Tasks In this exercise. Similar controls. Small blue dots. called drag controls.HVAC Plan . Resize an element using drag controls 1 In the Project Browser. as shown. These are the drag controls. referred to as shape handles. 2 Enter ZR. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area.Design. and tops of selected elements in elevation views and 3D views. Performing Common Tasks | 21 . Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the duct.17 Click the Home icon to return to the original view. After you are familiar with these tasks. and select the duct. you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. bottoms. and open Level 2 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . When drawing or modifying an MEP design. display along the ends. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial.Design ➤ Floor Plans. display at the ends of selected objects in a plan view.

4 Click in the drawing area to deselect the duct. select the first item in the list. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. In this example. Move. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. All changes you make to a project are tracked.3 Click and drag the bottom control. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). Move an element 7 Select the same duct used in the previous steps. click the Undo command. 22 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . on the Standard toolbar. 6 On the Undo menu. you decide that you prefer to leave the duct as is. Undo commands 5 On the Quick Access toolbar. or press CTRL+Z. moving the cursor up to shorten the duct.

8 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. In this case. After selecting the element to move. such as Move and Copy. Performing Common Tasks | 23 . click to specify the starting position. The duct is moved to the new position. Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. you want to move the duct. and drag it to the left as shown. as shown. for example. Some commands. require 2 clicks to complete the command. 10 Move the cursor to the right. and click again to specify the ending position. 9 Click the midpoint of the duct. 11 With the duct already selected.

End a command Some commands. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 13 To end a command. 14 Enter VG. For example. click the drop-down menu next to supply return air duct. you can also: ■ ■ Choose another command. you can specify visibility settings for specific elements in an HVAC plan in order to enable the display of supply duct and disable the display of return duct. Press ESC twice. 16 On the Quick Access toolbar. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. Override the display of objects You can control the visibility of objects in a view to display objects in specific ways. Select Mechanical . under Visibility: ■ ■ ■ Clear Mechanical . 15 On the Filters tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog.Return. such as the Modify Ducts command. Click OK.Supply. Notice that the return air duct is not displayed. (Undo) to redisplay the 24 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .

17 Close the file without saving your changes. Performing Common Tasks | 25 .

26 .

Creating an MEP Project In this exercise. and modify system settings.Getting Started with MEP Projects 3 In this lesson you learn how to start a project from a template. select Project. such as coordination review and interference checking. and open Imperial ➤ Templates. click Browse. A project template enables you to start a project by providing initial conditions. link files. You then learn how to customize the template by modifying the project settings and discipline settings. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. Start a project from an existing template 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. 5 In the New Project dialog. and click Open. you learn how to start a project from a template. settings. the default building levels and standard views. You also learn how to use collaboration tools. or you can save a project and use it as a new project template. Finally. 27 . The template selection may vary depending on your installation. under Create new. 2 In the New Project dialog. You can choose from several templates. In that case. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. create and manage views. 4 Select the i_Tutorial-Default. such as ducts and pipes. use copy/monitor. system families. 6 Click OK. and loadable families. and geometry from the starting template. New projects inherit all the families.rte template. such as the default project units and settings. under Template file. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. You can either select a template from the template library. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to the other templates. you learn how to organize the project browser to make it easy to view and access your project files. click Training files.

For Location. select Manchester. select School or University. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. For example. In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ On the Place tab. 18 In the Project Parameters dialog. Create a new project template based on the default systems template 12 Click ■ ■ ➤ New ➤ Project. select Project template. for City. select Level 1. ■ ■ Under Create new. zoom to right side of the drawing area to view the level heads. Notice that construction template is more complex than the default template and the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. 28 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 9 Close the file with or without saving it. 16 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. (Browse). ■ ■ For Ground Plane. 17 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. and open North. you can establish settings that are common to most projects.rte template and click Open. NH. When you select the material. 10 Using the same method. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. 13 In the New Project dialog: Under Template file. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. click Edit. and select the Systems-Default_Imperial. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. Click OK twice. for Energy Data. under Energy Analysis. click (Browse). In the Choose Template dialog. Modify project settings Project settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. click ■ ■ In the Building Construction dialog. Click Cancel. review the construction materials listed. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. create another new project using the Construction template. click Browse.7 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). navigate to Imperial Templates. select Sub-Discipline and click Modify. Some templates are simple with respect to the predefined views and schedules. 14 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. 8 In the drawing area. you can select it now. Click OK. you can select the materials commonly used in most projects. If you want to use a template other than the default. ■ For Building Construction.

Click OK twice. Modify mechanical settings Revit MEP has discipline settings that define the appearance and behavior of the system components in a project. ensure that Hook Wire Tick Mark is selected. piping. For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. click Sizes. power distribution systems. 10 1/2". under Duct Settings. Holding CTRL. Modify electrical settings Electrical settings determine the voltage. select Views. 4 1/2". Mechanical settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. After standard settings have been established for an organization. for 3 1/2". under Pipe Settings. 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog.rfa and click Open. 22 In the right pane. Duct sizes that are not commonly used are removed from the sizing lists to avoid having them created when sizing or laying out ducts. Discipline settings can be defined for electrical and mechanical disciplines. Define the tick marks that are used on wires by loading a family. For Ground Wire Tick Mark. 5 1/2". for 3/4". and 5 1/2". plumbing. 11 1/2". 33 Click OK. 24 In the right pane. 25 In the left pane. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. click Round. ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. 28 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. 23 In the left pane. select Identity Data.rfa and I_Long Wire Tick Mark. 31 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. 27 Click OK. click Wiring. click Rectangular. and 12 1/2". for 3 1/2". they can be configured in a template file to avoid having to set them for each project. 29 In the Load Family dialog: ■ ■ Browse to the Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks folder. 32 In the right pane: ■ ■ ■ For Hot Wire Tick Mark. wiring. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. and fire protection systems. For Categories. 30 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. 4 1/2".19 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. and demand factors for electrical systems. 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. 26 In the right pane. under Duct Settings. Creating an MEP Project | 29 . select I_Hook Wire Tick Mark.

Select Ascending Click OK twice. under Create new. You can use these techniques to create templates that are customized to your projects. Click Open.Origin to Origin. Close coordination between the two models is essential because the building envelope changes will directly affect the MEP design. For Sort by. and groups that are contained in a project. click Training. and adjust the display settings of the Revit Architecture project. you can specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser. 7 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. 38 Close the file. An architect has created a preliminary architectural model for a building project using Revit Architecture. Create a new project using the template created in the previous lesson 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. You can customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders. For Then by. select Sub-Discipline. You need to create the MEP model for the project. families. you link a Revit Architecture project to a Revit MEP project. 5 Click OK. From the Positioning list. Select Imperial\Arch Link Model_i. 37 Save this file to a location on your local system. sheets. You can also set filters to determine the number of views and sheets that are displayed. select Family and Type. synchronize the two models for monitoring changes. 30 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 2 In the New Project dialog. 4 In the New Project dialog. To enable this coordination. Notice that the file is saved as a template. select View Name.Organize the Project Browser The Project Browser lists all the views. 36 On the Folders tab of the Browser Organization Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Group by. 34 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and click Browser Organization. select Auto . under Template file. For Then by. Link a file 6 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link Revit. you link the architectural model with the MEP model. 3 Select the template you saved in the previous exercise and click Open. select Project.rvt. In addition. click Browse. select Type/Discipline and click Edit. 35 On the Views tab of the Browser Organization dialog. Linking Projects In this exercise. select Associated Level.

The architectural model links to the MEP model and the current view remains active. 8 If necessary, reposition elevations in the plan view as shown.

Enable bounding elements for spaces 9 In the drawing area, select the linked architectural model. 10 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 11 In the Type Properties dialog, under Constraints, select Room Bounding. 12 Click OK. 13 Press ESC to deselect the linked model. Add levels 14 Expand Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? and open North - Mech. 15 Zoom to the right side of the building to view the levels.

Linking Projects | 31

16 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 17 On the Options Bar, click Plan View types. 18 In the Plan View Types dialog, verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected and click OK. 19 On the left side of the view, click the level line for 03- Floor. 20 Move the cursor to the right side of the view and click to insert the level line for Mechanical 3. 21 Repeat the previous steps to create another level line for the roof. 22 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Adjust level lines You can adjust the level lines in the MEP design to match the level lines in the architectural model. 23 Select the level line for Level 2 and click the value.

24 Enter 12 and press ENTER. 25 Repeat the previous steps to adjust the level line for Level 2.

32 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Monitor the architectural levels You can monitor the elements within a Revit MEP model, and when the monitored elements are not synchronized, warnings notify you of any violations. These violations happen when the original monitored element from the linked project has changed, a copied monitored element in the host project has changed, or both original monitored and copied elements have changed. Warnings may also appear when the original element in the linked file is deleted or the copied element in the host file is deleted. Using the Copy/Monitor tool, you can copy elements within a current project or from a linked project to a host project. This establishes a relationship between the copied and original elements, which helps monitor changes to the original element and report differences. After copying, appears above the copied elements, indicating that a relationship is established, and that the copied elements are monitored. If you modify a monitored element, a warning message displays, indicating that an element has changed. 26 Click Collaborate tab ➤ Coordinate panel ➤ Copy/Monitor drop-down ➤ Select Link. 27 In the drawing area, highlight the linked model, and click to select the linked model. The Copy/Monitor tab is displayed. 28 Click Copy/Monitor tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Monitor. 29 In the drawing area, click the MEP level line labeled Level 1, then click the architectural model level line labeled 01-Entry Level. appears and the monitor tool ensures that both level lines remain coordinated. 30 Repeat the previous steps to monitor the level lines for level 2, level 3, and the level 4. 31 On the Copy/Monitor tab, click Finish to exit the Copy/Monitor tool. Disable the display of architectural levels 32 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 33 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click By Host View. 34 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 35 On the Annotation Categories tab:

For Annotation Categories, select Custom.

Linking Projects | 33

■ ■ ■

Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Levels. Click OK.

36 Click OK.

Creating and Applying a View Template
In this exercise, you create a view template and apply it to your project template. Create a view template 1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Templates drop-down ➤ Create template from current view. 2 In the New View Template dialog, for Name, enter Mechanical View and click OK. 3 In the View templates dialog, under View Properties, for V/G Overrides RVT Links, click Edit. 4 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click Custom. 5 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 6 On the Model Categories tab:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Model Categories, select Custom. Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Parking, Planting, Roads, Site, and Topography. Click OK.

7 Click OK twice. Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser, right-click Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? ➤ North - Mechanical and click Apply View Template.

34 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

9 In the Apply View Template dialog, under View Templates, select Mechanical and click OK.

10 Close the file with or without saving your changes.

Modifying System Settings
In this exercise, you learn how to control the system settings for Revit MEP. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects; they are not saved to project files or template files.

Modifying General System Options
In this exercise, you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment. These settings control the graphics, selection default options, notification preferences, journal cleanup options, and your username when using worksharing. Set graphics settings 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab. 3 Under Colors, select Invert background color, and click OK. 4 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new project.

5 In the New Project dialog, under Template file, click Browse. 6 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default.rte. 7 Click OK. Notice that the drawing area is black. 8 Click ➤ Options.

9 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab.

Modifying System Settings | 35

10 Under Colors, click the value for Selection color. 11 In the Color dialog, select yellow, and click OK. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. When an error occurs, the elements causing the error display using this color. 12 Click the General tab. 13 Under Notifications, specify the following options:
■ ■

For Save reminder interval, select One hour. For Tooltip assistance, select None.

14 Click OK. 15 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 16 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 17 Press ESC to end the command. 18 Select the wall.

Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. However, the Status Bar displays information about the highlighted element. 21 Close the file without saving it.

Specifying File Locations
In this exercise, you specify default file locations. These settings control locations of important Revit MEP files, including your default project template, family template files, and family libraries. Set file locations 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the File Locations tab. 3 Under Default template file, click Browse.

36 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template.

TIP To view a template, you can start a new project with that template. Click and click Browse to select a template. 4 Click Cancel. 5 Under Default path for user files, click Browse.

➤ New ➤ Project,

6 In the Browse For Folder dialog, select the folder to save your files to by default, and click Open. 7 In the Options dialog, under Default path for family template files, click Browse. This path is set automatically during the installation process. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. However, there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path, such as in a large, centralized, MEP firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. 8 Click Cancel. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog, click Places. 10 In the Places dialog, note the list of library names. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. Each library path points Revit MEP to a folder of families or training files. You can modify the existing library names and path, and you can create new libraries. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open, Save, Load, and Import dialogs.

When you are opening, saving, or loading a Revit MEP file, you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. In the following illustration, notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog.

Specifying File Locations | 37

and Import dialogs. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. and select it as the library path. 15 Under Library Name. click (Add Value). click the My Library icon. 16 Click 17 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. 38 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . Load. and click OK twice. and click (Browse). The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. templates. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. and change the name to My Library. click My Library. and click Open. or families. ➤ Open. Save. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog.11 In the Places dialog. 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP projects.

you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP. 26 Under Render Appearance Library Location. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. enter sheetmtl-Cu. 21 On the File Locations tab. If you want to relocate this path. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. 5 In the text editor. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. and decal image files. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. custom color files. 9 In the text editor. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. 27 Click OK. 20 Click ➤ Options. (Remove Value) to delete the library. scroll down to view the list of building industry terms. This path is determined during installation. specify the new location here. Specifying Spelling Options | 39 . select Ignore words in uppercase. 15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. 13 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 12 Create a new project using the default template. 14 Click in the drawing area. If you work in a large office. click Places. 22 Select My Library.Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. Specify rendering settings 25 Click the Rendering tab. click Edit. 19 Click Cancel. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. 3 Under Settings. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. 23 Click 24 Click OK. click OK. Modify spelling settings 1 Click ➤ Options. 11 In the Options dialog. view the current path. 2 In the Options dialog. click Edit. such as bump maps. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Spelling. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. click the Spelling tab. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards.

click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 4’ . 6 In the Snaps dialog. 22 In the text editor. Modify snap increments 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project.. and enter 1 . You can turn snap settings on and off. 4 In the New Project dialog. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. 21 Under Personal dictionary. under Dimension Snaps. In this exercise. you modify snap settings. click OK. 24 In the Options dialog. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it.17 In the Spelling dialog. 23 In the text editor.rte. 19 In the Options dialog. and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default. click Browse. click OK. 18 Click ➤ Options. As you zoom in and out within a view. click Close. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. click File menu ➤ Save. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. 40 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . and then click File menu ➤ Exit. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. 20 Under Settings. Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. delete sheetmtl-CU. click Restore Defaults. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. click the Spelling tab. 2 In the New Project dialog. click Edit. under Template file. you modify snap increments. 25 Close the file without saving it. click Training Files. work with snapping turned off. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. 5 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps.

If you do not have a wheel button. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. enter SM. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. 10 On the Options Bar. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. zoom out until it does so. If it does not. use the wheel button on your mouse. Modifying Snap Settings | 41 . you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. For example. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. and move the cursor to the right. deselect Chain.7 Under Object Snaps. TIP To zoom while sketching. This is the increment that you added previously. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 4’ increments. snapping reverts to the system default settings. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 1’. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. such as ZO to zoom out. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. 9 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. click OK. 8 In the Snaps dialog. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. While sketching.

and move the cursor to the right. the midpoint. and the wall edges. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 Click Place Wall tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. If you move the cursor along the wall.. 22 Move the cursor downward. 23 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. 26 Close the file. Notice that snapping is once again active. 20 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. 18 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. 25 Click OK. and specify the wall endpoint. 17 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. Do not set the wall end point. it will snap to the endpoints. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. and delete the value 1’ . Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. 24 Under Dimension Snaps. 42 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . the command is only active for one click of the mouse. 21 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall.14 Click to set the wall endpoint. with or without saving it. 19 Enter SM.

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan mechanical systems.Creating a Mechanical System In this tutorial. 43 . You also learn how to design a mechanical air system and a mechanical piping system.

44 .

You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. and then you create a plenum level. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. you will understand the process. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. However. you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building. By following the recommended workflow.Planning Mechanical Systems 4 In this tutorial. After finishing each exercise. you begin planning the system by placing spaces in the building. To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP. At the end of the tutorial. duct system and a hydronic piping system. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing.autodesk. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. In this exercise.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. This system consists of a cooling tower. water source heat pump (WSHP). you first configure the linked architectural model. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. methodology. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. After applying a color scheme to the zones. you design a mechanical system for an office building. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. go to http://www. you prepare a floor plan so that you can place spaces in later exercises. As you create the mechanical system. you first plan the system. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spatial environment. In this lesson. Preparing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. you learn best practices for system design while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. 45 . The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. Because most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design. you can choose to save your work. If the tutorial training files are not present.

you add a level for plenums. under Constraints. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and click OK. NOTE When working with a linked file. and after the linked model highlights. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model. roof. click Training Files.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_01_i. and ceiling) are defined as room-bounding.rvt. Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels so that you can place spaces in the unoccupied plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor above) of the building. 5 Press Esc to clear the selection. 1 In the Project Browser. In this section. The linked model is configured to place spaces using the linked building geometry to define the space volume. 46 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . indicating that it’s the active view. and floors) recognized as boundaries for spaces. Next. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to create an accurate analytical model and achieve an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. select Room Bounding. you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it. ceilings. 3 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. click to select it. Configure the linked model for space bounding The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. In the left pane of the Open dialog. not in the MEP training file. make certain that architectural elements (such as walls.Space Plan is highlighted. These components are defined in the architectural training file. The status bar located at the bottom of the window and the tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model. This makes the architectural components (such as walls. 4 In the Type Properties dialog.

Design ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). and enter Level 2 Plenum. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ MEP . click Yes (this will happen every time you create a new level). ■ 11 Draw a plenum level above Level 2 as follows: ■ ■ Click the left endpoint of the Level 2 line to specify the start point of the plenum level. 8 Click Place Level tab ➤ Element panel. For Offset. enter 8'. and is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. verify that only Floor Plan is selected. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. and in the Plan View Types dialog. Because you have not yet specified the view classification or sub-discipline properties. 16 Press Esc. 15 When asked to rename the corresponding level and views. offset by the Offset value (8' 0" ) above level 2. and click OK. 14 Double-click the level name (Level 4). Click the right endpoint of the Level 2 line. 9 On the Draw panel. This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. A black datum indicates a reference level (the level is not taken into account during the creation of a view template).MEP. 12 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Verify that Make Plan View is selected. A new plenum floor plan view named Level 2 Plenum is created.6 In the Project Browser. and a blue datum indicates that a plan view exists for the level. click 10 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ (Line). Preparing Spaces | 47 . Click Plan View Types. 13 Zoom in on the right side of the elevation view. The new level is placed. and select Level : Plenum from the Type Selector drop-down. those categories in the Project Browser are listed as question marks. and double-click West .

it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the training file that Autodesk provides. In this exercise. for Default View Template. 20 In the Project Browser. for View Scale. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. select Level Above (Level 3). Notice that the site plan displays in the view. select Plenum Plan. NOTE After finishing each exercise. for Top. In this exercise. and for Offset. for View Range. However.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. right-click Level 2 Plenum. and click Apply Default View Template. Under Extents. Under View Depth. verify that Associated Level (Level 2 Plenum) is specified with an offset of 0. you place spaces in areas of the building model. In the next exercise. Apply a view template 19 Open the Level 2 Plenum view. right-click Level 2 Plenum. select MEP . you use space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area. The Level 2 Plenum floor plan is now listed under MEP . For Cut plane. You apply the default view template so that only the architectural floor plan displays. you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view in preparation of placing spaces. and click Properties. 48 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . verify that 1/8" = 1'-0" is selected.Modify plenum properties 17 In the Project Browser. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. ■ Click OK twice. click Edit. select Design.Plenum. Under Identity Data. you can choose to save your work. and then place spaces in various types of areas. enter an Offset of 1' 0". For View Classification. The view graphics are modified based on the template applied. for Level. For Sub-Discipline. enter 0.

select Horizontal.rvt. 6 Place the cursor in the room until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements (floor.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 2 Zoom to the empty room to the left of the corridor. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Placing Spaces | 49 . For Offset. and ceilings). This specifies the vertical extent of the space. For (Tag Location). and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_02_i. You can also use the Highlight Boundaries feature to view boundary elements in the model. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. walls. ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is cleared. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel.Space Plan is highlighted. For Space. click Training Files. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. Spaces can be created automatically and numbered in sequence by using the Create Automatically tool. enter 0. select Level 2 Plenum. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select New. Place a space 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. For Upper Limit. indicating that it’s the active view.

Notice that the space number and name now match the room number and name from the linked architectural file. ■ 11 Press Esc to clear the selection. enter 219. 9 Select the space. enter Library. 50 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 8 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. 10 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. ensuring coordination between the files.7 Click to place the space. Prepare the plenum view 12 Open Design ➤ MEP .Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. 14 In the drawing area. double-click the section head in the Library to open the section view (Section 26). and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. For Name. Click OK. for Number. The software automatically zooms the new view to the same location as in the open view. 13 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden.

17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space.15 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Place a space in the plenum 16 Click in the Level 2 Plenum floor plan to activate it. and then click Modify. change the space name to Plenum and the number to 219P. 21 Using the method learned previously. 18 Select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. 19 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. For Offset. enter 0. 20 Click in the Library to place the space. select Level 3. Placing Spaces | 51 . Notice that the space is created in the section view at the same time. For Upper Limit. demonstrating the parametric functionality of the software.

select Plenum and verify that Occupiable is cleared.22 In the Instance Properties dialog. and then split the space using a space separation line. Placing a Space in an Open Area In this exercise. under Energy Analysis. 23 Click OK. This is beneficial to split up large volumes for equipment selection and sizing. you place a space in a large corridor area. 24 Notice that the floor plan has updated with the changes. 25 Close the file with or without saving it. 52 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .

6 Click above the top stair to place the corridor space. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_03_i. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. 2 Zoom in to the central corridor near the stairs. Place a space in an open area 1 In the Project Browser.rvt.Space Plan is highlighted. verify that Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . select Level 3. for Upper Limit. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. enter 0. and for Offset. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 53 . 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. click Training Files. indicating that it’s the active view. 5 On the Options Bar. and then press Esc.

13 To specify the start point of the separation line. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Schedule. the plan view would have updated with the changes. and press Enter. click the endpoint of the lower wall in space Instruction 221. change the space number to 216A. 11 Close the schedule view. which was numbered 219Q. 54 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . double-click the space name. as shown. 12 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space Separator. If you had modified the name and number in the schedule view instead. 8 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 10 Using the same method. 14 Click perpendicular to the opposite curtain wall to end the horizontal separation line. 9 In the floor plan. and double-click the title of the plan view to maximize the view. In the schedule.7 In the Project Browser. notice the corresponding architectural room name and number. and scroll to the newly placed space. and notice that the schedule updates with the changes. enter Corridor.

17 Change the name of the space to Corridor. Notice the changed boundaries of the corridor space. with an upper limit of Level 3 and an offset of 0. place a space in the lower area of the split space. 16 Using the method learned previously. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 55 . The new space is numbered correctly (216B). 18 Close the file with or without saving it.15 Press Esc twice.

3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Add a multi-level space 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Use the lower drag control to change the section boundary as shown. 56 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . If necessary. and place a section in the view as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the Cafeteria space to specify the section start point. click Training Files. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_04_i. Click in the Male restroom to specify the section endpoint. indicating that it’s the active view. click (Flip Section) to reorient the section. 2 Zoom to the chase between the male (226) and female (225) restrooms in the north wing.rvt.Space Plan is highlighted. you place a space in a chase. and change the upper limit to account for the entire volume of the chase. Shading is a visual indication of where spaces have been placed (shaded) and where they need to be placed (empty).Placing a Multi-Level Space In this exercise. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .

enter 4'. 8 Enter WT to tile the views. 12 Click in the section view. 13 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Constraints. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. 9 Zoom each view as necessary in order to view the chase. For Offset. 7 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. ■ ■ 14 Click OK. for Upper Limit. For Number. select Level 3. for Upper Limit. Under Identity Data. In the plan view. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 57 . enter 225PC. select the space. enter 0. 6 Enter VG. For Limit Offset. select Interior and Reference. and then click OK. 11 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and click Element Properties. expand Spaces. enter Chase. click in the chase area to place the space.4 Press Esc. Notice that you can see the space in the section view as well as in the plan view. but that the space does not fill the entire chase. You enter a value that is above the level of the roof. On the Options Bar. for Name. 10 In the plan view. select Roof Level. right-click. add a space: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space.

under Loaded Tags. floors. and you placed spaces for various types of areas. You used space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area that was part of a larger area. and roofs) define the extent of space volume used in calculations. 17 Type ZF.Bounding elements (such as walls. 19 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. Because the chase space is limited by a bounding element. 15 Press Esc. ceilings. select Space Tag With Volume. You have created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view.Space Plan. Tag spaces 16 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . the space displays the volume up to the roof only. In the next exercises. All spaces in the view are tagged. 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. and maximize the view. and click OK. you work with zones in order to control the spatial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. 58 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .

and verify that All Disciplines is selected. The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Notice that Default is currently the only zone. under Spaces. click Training Files. 3 Right-click in the System Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. click Reference. 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model. it is automatically added to the Default zone. The different graphics in the System Browser indicate whether a space is occupiable ( unoccupiable ( ). Zones allow you to control the spatial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis.rvt. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. After a space is placed in an area.Zoning is highlighted. You can change the Occupiable parameter for each space.Viewing Zones in the System Browser After spaces are placed in the building. which removes the space from the Default zone. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_01_i. ) or Viewing Zones in the System Browser | 59 . 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. The browser is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In this exercise. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone. click View ➤ Zones. To display space reference lines. you view and verify zones in the System Browser. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone.

on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and a new zone is created. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . select Computer Lab 222. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. You work with a single zone until you click Finish. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_02_i. and click OK. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog. click Training Files.rvt. you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. NOTE The Edit Zone tab provides zone tools and information. Using the Edit Zone tab. Next. and verify the zones in the System Browser.5 In the System Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. indicating that the space is occupiable. you assign spaces to zones in the building. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. 60 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. The graphic in the System Browser updates.Zoning is highlighted. you can add or remove a space from the zone. Instruction 221. under Energy Analysis. Creating Zones on a Single Level In this exercise. you assign spaces to a zone. and modify the zone properties. To display space reference lines. under Spaces. and click Finish Editing Zone. 4 In the drawing area. click Reference. double-click 121 Cafeteria. Assign spaces to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. The Zone tool is active. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and Electrical 220 spaces. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. the Edit Zone tab displays. As you do this. 3 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. select Occupiable. The new zone is listed in the System Browser. indicating that it’s the active view.

type VG. ■ The new zone displays with color fill and a zone reference line. Instruction. select HVAC Zones. and then select only Interior Fill and Reference Lines (clear Boundary and Color Fill). To view the zone in the drawing area. The zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone. 5 With the drawing area active. 6 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog: ■ ■ Under Visibility. Creating Zones on a Single Level | 61 . you need to activate the zone visibility. expand the new zone and notice that the Computer Lab. and Electrical spaces are added to it (and removed from the Default zone). Expand HVAC Zones.In the System Browser. Click OK.

In this exercise. 9 In the System Browser. and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and in the System Browser. enter 2 . 3 Open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 62 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Zoning. and click OK. and verify the zone in the System Browser. Rename the zone 7 Select the zone. 10 On the Edit Zone tab. 4 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows. you assigned zones to spaces that were on the same level of the building. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels In this exercise.Area B. 11 Close the System Browser. for Name. click Training Files.West . and then click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Zone Properties. you can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone. indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Zoom in to Lounge 215 (to the right of the central stairs). on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog.Zoning is highlighted.Area B to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. expand 2 . Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. you assign spaces on multiple levels to a zone in the building. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Finish Editing Zone. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_03_i. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. click Reference. 12 Close the file with or without saving it.West . under Identity Data. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.TIP After you finish editing the zone. under Spaces. Create a zone for spaces on multiple levels 1 In the Project Browser. You activated zone visibility in the views.rvt. To display space reference lines.

Zoning view to activate it. click in the Level 2 . 7 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. 8 In the Level 1 . 13 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is selected. 9 With the Add Space tool active.Zoning view. and then select the tag so that you can use the drag control to move it as desired. zoom out.5 Click in the Level 1 . Tag a zone 11 Activate the Level 1 .Zoning view. Verify that the distance is 1/2". select Lounge 120 to add it to the zone. Select Attached End. 6 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. 14 Click in the Lounge space to tag the associated zone. 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 15 Press Esc. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels | 63 . and add the Lounge 215 space to the zone.Zoning floor plan. 10 Click Finish Editing Zone.

18 Press F9 to display the System Browser. Because the heating and cooling loads calculations have not been performed.rvt. you verify the building. View a space 3 In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. 64 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . double-click the zone tag. on the ViewCube. under Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans.East. enter Lounge . double-click Level 1 . you created a zone for spaces on different levels of the building. click Training Files.Zoning to make it the active view. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. space. for Name Value. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You can expand the zone in the System Browser to view the spaces in it. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_01_i. and click OK. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. the tag displays “Not Computed” for those values. Working with the Analytical Model In this exercise. and Left corners converge to orient the model as shown. and zone information. and view graphical representations of the spaces to verify space boundaries and volumes. Verify building information 1 In the Project Browser. Rename the zone 16 In the Level 1 . 17 In the Change Parameter Values dialog. Front. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. click the corner where the Top.Zoning view.The tag only displays in the view where it was placed. In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

The space displays while all other spaces are hidden. The space for 109 Lounge highlights in red. NOTE Wireframe displays the volume of a space measured by the interior boundaries. The Details tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. you isolate the space. and select 109 Lounge. Click (Highlight). ■ TIP You can use the ViewCube to spin/reorient the view. Right-click in the preview pane to access pan and zoom commands. you can verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. 5 On the Details tab: ■ Expand 1_South_Lounge. verify that Wireframe is selected. You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building. With 109 Lounge selected.4 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces even if they are usually obstructed by other spaces or by the building architecture. click (Isolate). Using the Highlight tool. ■ Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. ■ Working with the Analytical Model | 65 . Next.

6 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. select 109 Lounge. This specifies the number of people or the area per person for the space. 66 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space. click . For Electrical Loads. Revit MEP provides default settings for space types. scroll down in the left pane. and in the Space Type Settings dialog. click . You can use the Space Type Settings dialog to adjust settings as necessary. and click OK. the space information displays for the selected space.■ On the Details tab. verify that <Building> is selected. For People. Next. and then click OK. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the zone. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. select Lounge/Recreation. select 1_South_Lounge. click . verify that <Default> is selected for Occupancy and Heat Gain (per person). Verify space information 7 On the Details tab. All spaces in the zone display in isolation. Below the list of spaces and zones. verify that <Default> is selected for Lighting Values and for Power Values. For Construction Type. and in the People dialog. 8 Verify the space information: ■ For Space Type. and then click OK. These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. ■ ■ ■ Next. and in the Electrical Loads dialog.

NOTE By not specifying values for the humidification set point and dehumidification set point. verify that 74. Next. For Heating Information. Working with the Analytical Model | 67 . verify that N/A : N/A : N/A is specified.00 °F : 90. This indicates the heating set point. 12 Using the methods learned previously. For Cooling Information. you use the Shading view to examine the inner volume of the model for voids. and air changes per hour. heating air temperature. highlight and isolate the space for 109 Lounge to view its inner volume. roofs.00 °F : 54. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls.Verify zone information 9 Select 1_South_Lounge. verify that <Building> is selected. floors. View the shaded model 11 On the View Selector. This is usually preferable to indicating a particular percentage for those parameters. ■ ■ For Outdoor Air Information. cooling air temperature. the zone information displays for the selected zone. 10 Verify the zone information: ■ ■ For Service Type. and zoom to the corner of the building as shown. outdoor air per area. This indicates the cooling set point. Below the list of spaces and zones. and humidification set point. you allow the values to be calculated by the loads engine. 13 Deactivate the Isolate tool.00 °F : N/A is specified. NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space. and other room-bounding components. and dehumidification set point. This indicates the outdoor air per person.00 °F : N/A is specified. verify that 70. click (Shading).

for Number. Under Energy Analysis. enter 0.Notice that there is a void in a second-floor plenum space. 68 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Notice that Condition Type updates to Unconditioned.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. and then click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. notice that Condition Type is Heated and Cooled. ■ ■ Add the plenum space to a zone 21 In the drawing area. open MEP . 15 In the Project Browser. Add a space to fill a void 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. Modify space properties 19 Select the space. For Name. Because this is an unoccupied space. select the zone that includes all plenum spaces for Level 2 (named 2_Plenum). 16 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Upper Limit. it doesn’t need to be included in the heating and cooling loads analysis. enter 212P. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. Under Energy Analysis. 18 Click in the empty plenum area to place the space. select Plenum. Click OK. select Level 3. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. click Cancel. For Offset. select Plenum.

On the Place tab. select School or University. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_02_i. double-click Level 2 . NH.22 Click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Zone panel ➤ Edit Zone. 3 In the Instance Properties dialog. Specify project settings 1 In the Project Browser. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads In this exercise. under Energy Analysis. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 69 . 23 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. In this exercise. The report that is the result of this analysis allows you to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. 4 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. for Energy Data. click in the Value field. and verify that the space has replaced the void. enter 03101. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and then click In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ ■ . Select Automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings changes. and select space Plenum 212P.rvt. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. space. click Training Files. and zone information. For Location. 24 Click Finish Editing Zone. and you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis. is selected. you verified building. verify that Manchester. for City. you specify project settings that affect heating and cooling.Space Plan. For Postal Code. 25 Open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. click Edit.

For Latent. under Volume Computations. Select Area per person. ■ In the Type Properties dialog. enter 200 Btu/h. 70 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . verify that Use closest weather station (Manchester Airport) is selected. If. click in the Value column. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. you need to select this option. select Heated and cooled. click Edit. For Building Construction. verify that Occupiable is selected. and click OK. verify that New Construction is selected. select space Library 219. select Specified. Click OK twice. verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting). 6 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. For Sensible. For Ground Plane. a cooling load. ft. right-click. for Values. In the People dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Occupancy.Audio Visual. verify that 1' 0" is specified. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is specified. verify that <Building> is specified. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected in order to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. first highlight it using the cursor so that the space crossing lines display. verify that Level 1 is selected. ■ On the Weather tab. For Export Complexity. For Sliver Space Tolerance. 7 Zoom in to the center area of the building. and click OK. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Space Type Settings dialog. Under Heat Gain (per Person). and click OK. verify that Simple with Shading Surfaces is selected. or neither.When the location is in an area that observes Daylight Savings Time. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Energy Analysis. In order to select a space. you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. this option adjusts the times automatically. select Specified. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify area and volume setting 5 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Area and Volume Computations. For Condition Type. For People. and enter 50 sq. enter 150 Btu/h. select Library . 8 In the drawing area. This is the parameter that determines whether a space is included in a heating load. for Values. after opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. For Project Phase. for Building Service. and then click . For Space Type. both. and click Element Properties.

verify that School or University is selected. In the Electrical Loads dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Lighting. select Actual. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is selected. and under Heating Information. for Values. verify the settings specified earlier: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Building Construction dialog). click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. For Building Service. For Building Construction. Select the space associated with the warning. Under Power. ■ Select 2_Middle_Library. verify that Manchester. If you have made changes to settings in the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. is specified. The information for the space that you entered in the Element Properties dialog displays. select 219 Library. select Actual. and click OK. it should be corrected before you calculate loads. for Values. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 71 . See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. Next. 11 On the General tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. and can be modified here. 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. Various factors (such as analytical and inner volumes of the spaces) are analyzed as Revit MEP performs the heating and cooling loads analysis. 12 Click the Details tab. 13 Under 2_Middle_Library. You have verified the building information. If a (Warning) displays for any space in the building. click Information). There should be no warnings displayed. click Edit. (Zone Heating ■ In the Heating Information dialog. Revit MEP stores this information as project information. NH. (opens the IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. and then re-open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog to begin calculations. You should correct the space error in the building model. Click OK twice.■ ■ ■ Click OK. For Electrical Loads. verify that Heating Set Point is 70°F . and click to learn the cause for the warning. verify that <Building> is specified. For Location. click Calculate.

verify that Cooling Load by Zone is selected. 15 Review the loads report for project. under the zone summary for 2_Middle_Library. 2 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. and a loads report displays. you can rezone the model as necessary to optimize equipment usage in the building. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_03_i. indicating that it’s the active view. space. 72 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 19 In the drawing area. Assign a color scheme to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. space. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed. weather. 21 Click OK. 3 In the drawing area. 4 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. or make any changes to the model. click Training Files. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. Creating a Zone Color Scheme In this exercise. For Color Scheme. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. 17 In the loads report. you assign a color scheme to a zone in the building. select HVAC Zones.rvt. 18 Close the report and activate Level 2 . under Energy Analysis. you performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report. click the blue hyperlink for 219 Library. click to the right of the building to place the legend. or zone information. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. You are taken to the place in the report where the space information is displayed for review. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. review the Calculated Loads and Design Loads. Notice that the space information was automatically updated. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than by using space schedules or accessing element properties.Space Plan. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Click OK. 16 After you review the loads report. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. In this exercise. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. and then click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select 219 Library.Zoning Load Fill is highlighted. and zone information for the building model.

7 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. under Schemes. Creating a Zone Color Scheme | 73 . 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. The new scheme displays in the view. Select a different color scheme legend 6 In the drawing area. in 1-ton increments. and click OK.5 Zoom in to the legend. select the color scheme legend. Notice that the cooling load is based on tonnage value. select Tonnage Range. You want a scheme that allows for a greater tonnage range.

74 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . The colors are updated in the plan view to match the new scheme type. 9 Type ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. 11 Using the method learned previously. open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. Apply a color scheme to a section view 10 In the Project Browser. add a Cooling Load by Zone color scheme to the HVAC zones of the section view.The new scheme allows for a greater range of cooling load values.

select Spaces. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. For Name. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. select New Construction. for Select available fields from. Click OK. Define the schedule 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . click Training Files. select Spaces. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Report and Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 75 . enter Space Airflow Schedule. Creating an Airflow Schedule In this exercise. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements.rvt.Space Fill is the active view. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_04_i. In this exercise.12 Close the file with or without saving it. For Phase. you create a schedule for the supply air system project. Select Schedule building components. If you select Show categories from all disciplines. more category options are available. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you create a schedule that you use as a design tool for the supply air system. In the next exercise. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify schedule properties 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ At the bottom left of the dialog.

the calculated value named Airflow Delta displays under Scheduled fields and will display as a column in the schedule. In the Fields dialog. select Level. Select Formula. select Airflow Delta. Click OK.■ Under Available fields. For Formula. and Blank line. For Then by. and then select Hidden field. enter Airflow Delta. 76 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . For Discipline. In the Schedule Properties dialog. Header. Define conditional formatting for the airflow delta ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ For Test. and then click Conditional Format. select HVAC. In the Calculated Value dialog. For Type. and click OK. double-click: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Number Name Calculated Supply Airflow Actual Supply Airflow The selected fields are added to the Scheduled fields section. Define the airflow delta formula 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. select Number. for Formula. select Not Between. select Air Flow. ■ ■ Using the method learned previously.(minus sign) after Calculated Supply Airflow. For Fields. click (Browse). enter . Specify additional schedule properties ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. add Actual Supply Airflow to the formula. ■ On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ For Fields. Select Ascending. select Level. You format the Airflow Delta field to display as red when the difference between calculated and actual airflow is outside an acceptable range. and then click . select Calculated Supply Airflow. ■ Click Calculated Value.

Under Conditions to Use. all the Actual Supply Airflow values are 0. you use the airflow schedule when adding system components to satisfy the required airflow. verify that Show is highlighted. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. Click OK twice.■ ■ ■ For Value. In the Color dialog. and you can manipulate the display of columns as with any spreadsheet. In the next lesson. Double-click the column boundary to expand the column to the width of the text. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. When you select a field and click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Highlight in Model. or right-click a column to hide or unhide it. you created an airflow schedule and defined properties such that when the airflow delta is in an unacceptable range. right-click to access schedule properties. and click OK. Because no air terminals have been placed in the model. 6 On the Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel. a view opens that contains the selected space. and all Airflow Delta fields are red for occupiable spaces. notice that the software will test for delta values that are outside the range of -25 to 25 CFM. ■ The schedule displays. In this exercise. select red. the schedule gives a visual indication of the discrepancy. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 77 . click the color swatch. enter -25 CFM and 25 CFM. For Background Color. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. In later exercises.

78 .

Designing Mechanical Air Systems 5 Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. As you place the air terminals. you use automatic layout tools and manual placement to create the primary and secondary supply air systems and ductwork to connect the components that you added. Then. After system creation. learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. Placing Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. and work with the airflow schedule. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Mechanical Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. 79 . you modify air terminal parameters. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding a water source heat pump (WSHP). you size ductwork and validate your air system design. you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. After completing the air systems lesson. In this lesson. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. you will create supply air systems.

rvt. and notice that the space is selected in the plan view as well. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans ➤ Level 2 . 4 Click in the schedule view to make it active. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and scroll to space 223. 2 Double-click Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule. indicating that it’s the active view. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_01_i. 80 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . click Training Files.HVAC Ceiling is highlighted. Prepare the design views 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Select space 223 in the schedule. and then click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. the space crossing lines display. 3 In the ceiling view.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. When you highlight a space using the cursor. zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner.

the hosted elements are updated as well. and select Supply Diffuser .Hosted from the Type Selector drop-down. and press Enter. which in this case is the ceiling grid. select the diffuser. 15 On the Options Bar.HVAC Ceiling to make it the active view.Add a supply air terminal 6 Click in Level 2 . 17 Move the cursor down. and then select both Copy and Multiple. and then press Esc to end the command. 11 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. NOTE Hosted air terminals are placed at the height of the host. the Airflow Delta is calculated accordingly. click Place on Face. verify that Constrain is cleared. 13 On the Options Bar. for Flow. Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the diffuser without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. Notice that the lounge’s Actual Supply Airflow field in the schedule updates after the terminal is placed.Rectangular Face Round Neck . 19 Place 2 additional diffusers as shown. If the host element is modified or moved. 9 On the Placement panel.Hosted : 24"x24" Face 8" Neck . The schedule updates with the new flow data. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and press Enter. Copy the supply diffuser 14 With the diffuser still selected. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 81 . as shown. Also. 8 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Element panel. 16 Select the upper left corner of the diffuser as the copy start point. Modify the supply diffuser flow 12 In the ceiling plan. enter 425 CFM. type 12. 18 Repeat to add a third diffuser. 10 Click to place the supply diffuser in the upper left corner of the space.

Hosted : Workplane-based Return Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. you edit the return diffuser family in order to align the diffuser edges to the ceiling grid lines. 24 In the Open dialog. 27 Select Return Diffuser . and then press Esc.rfa. and click Open. 22 In the drawing area. 28 On the Placement tab. If alerted that there is no tag loaded for the diffuser object. clear Leader. and the airflow delta value is within acceptable range. As you place the return diffusers. navigate to Training\Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\Diffuser Tag. Place return diffusers 26 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. as shown. 25 In the drawing area. 82 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Each diffuser has an airflow capacity of 425 CFM.Tag diffusers 20 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 29 Place 2 diffusers. Next. click Yes. 21 On the Options Bar. click Place on Face. you load one from the library as follows: 23 In the alert dialog. notice that the insertion point snaps the center of each diffuser to a grid intersection instead of centering the diffuser between grid lines. select each of the 5 supply diffusers. select one of the diffusers.

33 Highlight one of the symbolic lines. and click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. You change the symbolic lines to strong references so that they can be used to align to the lines of the ceiling grid. Level. and click to select the lines. 36 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. under Other. 34 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Instance Properties. 31 In the alert dialog. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. select Strong Reference. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 83 . as shown. open Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Ref. 32 In the Project Browser. and click OK. select one of the return diffusers. for Reference. click Yes.Edit the diffuser family 30 In the drawing area. 35 In the Instance Properties dialog.

37 In the Family Already Exists dialog, click Overwrite the existing version and its parameter values. Align the diffusers in the ceiling grid 38 In the ceiling plan, zoom in to the return diffuser at the bottom left of the Lounge. 39 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 40 In the drawing area, select the vertical grid line as shown.

41 Select the right edge of the diffuser. 42 Select the horizontal grid line as shown, and then select the top edge of the diffuser.

43 Using the same method, align the other return diffuser, as shown, and then press Esc twice.

44 While pressing Ctrl, select both return diffusers, and on the Options Bar, for Flow, enter 650 CFM310 CFM, and press Enter. Modify the airflow display arrows 45 Select the return diffuser at the lower left, right-click, and click Element Properties. 46 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Mechanical, clear LeftArrow, and click OK.

84 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

47 Using the same method, clear RightArrow and DownArrow for the other return diffuser.

48 Close the file with or without saving it.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals
In this exercise, you place air terminals in a room that does not have a dropped ceiling. As you place the air terminals, you modify air terminal parameters and work with the airflow schedule.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_02_i.rvt.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 85

Add non-hosted air terminals 1 In the Project Browser, expand HVAC - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design to make it the active view. 2 On the View Control Bar, for Scale, click 1/8" = 1'-0". 3 Zoom in to space Instruction 115, at the lower left corner of the building. When you highlight a space using the cursor, the space crossing lines display, and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. 5 Open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule, and then click View tab ➤ Windows ➤ Tile. 6 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 8 In the Type Selector, select Supply Diffuser - Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 - 8 Neck. 9 On the Options Bar, verify that Tag on Placement is selected. 10 In the drawing area, click to place the air terminal in the space as shown, and then click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

The schedule was automatically updated with the actual supply airflow capacity of the diffuser. Also, the diffuser was tagged as it was placed. NOTE The software assigns sequential numbers to components in the order in which they are placed in a drawing. If you delete a component and subsequently place more of the same component in the same drawing, the number assigned to the deleted component will not be used. As a result, your components may be numbered differently than those in the training files. 11 Select the diffuser, and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 12 Modify the diffuser properties:

In the Instance Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Offset, enter 8'. Because non-hosted components are associated with a level, the offset value is the height of the diffuser from the level. Under Mechanical - Airflow, for Flow, enter 360 CFM. Click OK.

■ ■

86 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

13 With the diffuser still selected, click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 14 Select the bottom left corner of the diffuser, move the cursor down, type 20', and then press Enter. 15 Press Esc. By copying the diffuser, you are also specifying the same offset and flow for the new diffuser. Notice that the copied air terminal does not have a tag.

16 Using the same method, select both air terminals and copy them 14' to the right.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 87

Tag existing diffusers 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 18 On the Options Bar, clear Leader. 19 Select each of the untagged diffusers, and then press Esc. Create an embedded schedule You enhance the schedule by creating an embedded schedule to show data (system type, type, mark, and flow) for individual diffusers in each space. 20 Double-click the title bar of the Space Airflow Schedule to maximize it, and then right-click in the schedule, and click View Properties. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Other, for Embedded Schedule, click Edit. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

Select Embedded Schedule. For Category, select Air Terminals, and then click Embedded Schedule Properties.

23 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click System Type, Type, Mark, and Flow. 24 On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Mark. 25 Click OK 3 times. The schedule is updated and lists the data for individual air terminals in each space. Although the Airflow Delta value is within an acceptable range, it is a negative value. Next, you modify the airflow capacity of the diffuser in the lower left corner of the space to offset the increased heat gain of the southwesterly exposure.

88 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

Modify an airflow value in the schedule You use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow. 26 Using the method learned previously, tile the windows. 27 In the schedule, under space 115, select SD 1-12-110. 28 In the embedded portion of the Space Airflow Schedule, for Flow, enter 450 CFM, and press Enter. 29 Using the same method, change the flow for SD 1-12-111 and 112 to 330 CFM. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project, because you are modifying the digital database of building information. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM).

The Airflow Delta value for the space updates to a positive number.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 89

Place air handling equipment 30 Close the Space Airflow Schedule, and maximize Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design. 31 In the drawing area, select the zone (2-West-Area T) that includes space 115. As you highlight the zone, pay attention to the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you’re selecting the zone and not the space. The zone indicator has a line that spans all spaces in the zone, as shown.

32 Open the Instance Properties dialog, and under Energy Analysis, verify that the Calculated Heating Load value is 33807 Btu/h and the Calculated Cooling Load value is 3.9 ton (approximately 1.5 times the heating load). 33 Click OK. 34 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 35 In the Type Selector, select WSHP - Horizontal - High Efficiency - 2-5 Tons - Left Return - Right Discharge : 4 Tons. 36 In the drawing area, zoom and pan to the double door for space 115. 37 Press Spacebar twice to change the rotation of the pump so that the supply faces the space and the return faces away from the space. 38 Click to select an insertion point so that the supply is at the approximate center of the doorway. 39 Press Esc twice to end the command.

90 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

40 Access the instance properties for the heat pump. 42 Press Esc to clear the selection. Verify equipment mounting heights 43 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 91 . ■ ■ For the end point. For the start point. click the Level 1 line. enter 9' 0"2750. click to select the midpoint of the bottom of the WSHP. and click OK. and verify the height of the WSHP: ■ ■ Click Modify tab ➤ Inquiry panel ➤ Measure drop-down ➤ Measure Between Two References. Verify that the measured distance is 9'. 41 In the Instance Properties dialog. 44 Zoom in to space 115. for Constraints ➤ Offset.

After creating the logical connection. You then create the logical connection between the system components. right-click the title. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. In this exercise. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.rvt. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Verify that there are no Mechanical systems listed. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_03_i. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 at the upper left of the building. including energy analysis.Design is highlighted. However. click Training Files. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. the space crossing lines display. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 92 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . IMPORTANT Unlike logical connections. they are necessary to perform calculations (such as sizing) that reference the physical geometry.HVAC Plan . When you highlight a space. and click View ➤ Systems. 4 If the System Browser title is Zones. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. A Revit MEP system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment.Press Esc. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. verify that Design ➤ HVAC . indicating that it’s the active view.

On the Options Bar. 13 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. 15 Click Cancel. All of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. and Create Systems) available on the Modify Air Terminals tab. 6 Keep the System Browser open. These tools vary depending on the equipment used to create a system. Create a secondary air system 7 In the drawing area. Connect Into. 10 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. and Flow value. 12 In the System Browser. select the 3 supply diffusers shown in red and circled. expand Mechanical ➤ Supply Air ➤ Mechanical Supply Air 1. Revit MEP assigned them to the Default Supply Air system. select the supply diffuser at the upper left of space 223. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy. Notice that a mechanical system now displays in the System Browser. the number of elements is updated. and drag it to the bottom of the screen so that it displays horizontally below the floor plan. 16 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. Because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. Notice that there are layout and system tools (Generate Layout.IMPORTANT In the System Browser. Only mechanical equipment components can be highlighted and selected when you are using the Add To System tool. 8 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Supply. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 93 . As you add diffusers to systems. and then select the last supply diffuser in space 223. System Name. Note that the Flow value (1700 CFM) is equal to the sum of the flow values for the 4 diffusers you added to the system. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 9 Click Modify Duct Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. review the Number of Elements. 11 In the drawing area. the assigned diffusers move to the respective system folder.

This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. You used the Create Supply Systems tool to logically connect air terminals to the WSHP. and the system connects them. under Mechanical. 22 Click OK. 19 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Select Equipment. the air terminals are the children. NOTE The organization of the Mechanical folder in the System Browser has changed so that the WSHP is the parent. 94 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . under Identity Data. for Mark. which updates the name in the System Browser. 26 Click Finish Editing System. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. In this exercise. you create ductwork to physically connect system components. highlight the value and click Ctrl+V to paste over the selection. access system properties to see that the flow value (2125 CFM) has updated to include the flow value of the final supply diffuser. for System Name. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. and then select the WSHP (located outside the space). 18 Click OK. highlight the value (WSHP 2-45) and click Ctrl+C to copy it. 23 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. 20 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Equipment Properties.17 Using the method learned previously. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. 25 Click OK. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. you rename the system to match the identifying data (Mark) of the equipment properties. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. The system name is updated from Mechanical Supply Air 1 to WSHP 2-45 in the System Browser. Rename the system Next. In this exercise. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog.

Add ductwork using the Generate Layout tool 1 In the Project Browser. and display solution 1. Also. Lines indicate the proposed duct layout (blue signifies a main duct line and green signifies a branch). the Network type provides several solutions. the space crossing lines display. the software recognizes the system components and sketches a temporary layout path connecting them. A Generate Layout tab displays. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_04_i. select Network. click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser to display it. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. In this case.rvt. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 95 . 5 On the Options Bar. for Solution Type.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 4 In the drawing area. each with branches off the main duct at 90-degree angles. which provides various layout tools. click Training Files. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 3 If the System Browser isn’t displayed. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. When you highlight a space using the cursor. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 Use the Next Solution and Previous Solution arrows to scroll through the available solutions. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name.HVAC Plan.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Design is highlighted. indicating that it’s the active view. select the upper left diffuser.

For Maximum Flex Duct Length. enter 9' 10 1/2". For Offset. Click OK. click Settings. WARNING Be careful not to drag the main duct too close to the diffusers. Select Branch. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. you’ll get an error in a later step. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. enter 3'. 96 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . If there is not enough room for the software to create the necessary fittings. select Flex Duct Round : Flex . 9 On the Generate Layout panel. For Duct Type. 10 Select a vertical segment of the main duct. and use the drag control to drag it just to the left of the lighting fixtures.Round. as shown.7 On the Options Bar. For Duct Type. For Flex Duct Type. click Modify. For Offset. enter 9' 10 1/2". 8 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Main.

The sketch lines are converted to ductwork. as is the elbow itself. Remember to always check duct connectivity after modification. All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. For example. Either relocate the system components. a transition connecting the elbow is automatically added. or offset elevations are incorrect. select a different layout solution.11 Click Finish Layout. The most common cause of these errors is that the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. or manually modify the duct. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 97 . NOTE Errors may occur while attempting to create duct geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing.

13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Duct Legend. The ductwork is a physical (not a logical) connection. 14 Click to the right of the system to place the legend. The first time you press Tab. and then click OK. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops.Flow. Using a flow-based color scheme. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts.NOTE Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. highlight a segment of the main duct. fittings. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. and equipment. select By View. press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. and click OK. under Graphics. Usually. Notice that the legend includes all possible values for the color scheme. NOTE When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. 98 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . If the entire network does not highlight. you can verify connectivity as you create a system. for Values Displayed. 17 In the Type Properties dialog. and click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. Add a color scheme legend 12 In the drawing area. Modify the legend display 16 Select the color scheme legend. but not all values are used in this view. 15 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. and click to select it. for Color Scheme. You can delete ductwork and the system remains. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then pressing Tab. select Duct Color Fill . you can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. a disconnection exists. thus it is not part of the system.

for Flow. 25 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. for Schemes. Modify flow values 18 In the drawing area.Airflow. Notice that the color fill for the connected ductwork has updated. under Mechanical . 20 In the drawing area. note the Air Flow value (2125 CFM). select Duct Color Fill . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 99 . and click OK. decrease the flow value by 100 CFM. Edit color scheme 23 In the drawing area. 22 Close the Instance Properties dialog. and on the Options Bar. and press Enter. and then press Esc to clear the selection. select the color scheme legend. 24 Click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. Use the velocity-based color scheme as a visual reference to confirm that air is flowing through the system ductwork at the appropriate velocity.The legend now shows only the color scheme values used in this view. and notice that the flow value has updated with the change. 26 Click OK. 21 Access the instance properties for the WSHP.Velocity. The outflow for the WSHP is calculated as the sum of the airflows for all downstream air terminals. select the WSHP. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. select one of the diffusers in the system. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

click Cancel. and then click to select it. highlight a segment of the duct. Select Only. Repeat the steps necessary to select the entire system and then size it. press Tab 3 times to highlight the entire system (including the WSHP). 28 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. you need to modify the layout: ■ ■ ■ In the warning dialog. Select Restrict Height. Under Constraints. and drag it to the right.Calculate duct sizes 27 In the drawing area. for Branch Sizing. Select the upper segment of main duct.08 in-wg/100ft. 100 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 29 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. and select 16". The flow information graphically represents the properties of duct systems so that you can easily identify problems with the system. select Calculated Size Only. If you get an error that there is not enough room to place the required fittings. select Friction. Click OK. The ductwork and fittings are updated. and enter .

and pressure loss. pressure.Inspect the system The System Inspector is a tool that lets you place the cursor over each system to inspect it for airflow. The selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected for you to use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork. so that you can modify the system design accordingly. 33 Move the cursor over the system components. Use the information that displays (flow. 31 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. 30 Select one of the ducts in the supply air system. Using this tool. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection). 32 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. and pressure loss) to find deficiencies in the system. you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. Notice that the ribbon now displays a System Inspector tab. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 101 . and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). static pressure.

remember that all information is color-coded according to pressure. also known as the critical path. 34 Zoom in to various parts of the system and verify that the flow arrows are correct. you modify existing ductwork and then use the Connect Into tool to connect components to the existing air system. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Manually Creating Ductwork In this exercise. 35 Click Finish.NOTE As you inspect a system. 36 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction.rvt. click Training Files. 102 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . You also convert rigid duct into specified lengths of flex duct. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_05_i.

Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 7 Move the cursor to just below the lowest set of diffusers. 6 Click midway between the 2 top light fixtures to specify the end of the first segment of the main duct. and select the WSHP.Design is highlighted. and select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Beveled Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. and click to specify the end of the main duct. Manually Creating Ductwork | 103 .Manually create main duct line 1 In the Project Browser.HVAC Plan . 2 Zoom in to space Instruction 115 in the lower left corner. 5 Press Spacebar to make the new duct match the WSHP duct size and location. and click Draw Duct. 3 Right-click the supply air connector (the connector facing the room’s double doors). 4 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Element panel. indicating that it’s the active view. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .

click the corner where the Top. Create branch duct lines 9 To begin branch duct. and Left sides converge in order to orient the view as shown. select 9' 10 1/2". use the connector grip to quickly and accurately locate a connector. Connect the remaining diffusers using the Connect Into tool The Connect Into tool is used to add or connect components to an existing air system. select the top right diffuser. NOTE When drawing duct. The software accounts for the difference in height from the diffuser connector to the specified offset height. 14 In the Project Browser. for Offset. 12 End the branch by clicking at the intersection of the branch duct and the main duct. double-click MEP .3D MEP. Front. 10 Select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows/Taps from the Type Selector drop-down.8 Press Esc twice to end the command. Click this corner Resulting view orientation 104 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Level 1 . right-click the connector grip. 13 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 15 On the ViewCube. and click Draw Duct. 11 On the Options Bar.

21 Click the main supply duct to select it as the duct to connect into. 18 Make the floor plan the active view. Also. Manually Creating Ductwork | 105 . and is sized appropriately for the neck size of the diffuser. connect the remaining diffusers to the main duct. 20 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. Because this branch has 2 end points (the diffuser and the connector into the main duct). select the top unconnected supply diffuser. in space 115. 17 Tile the windows so that you can view results in 3D as you add duct in 2D. 19 In the drawing area.16 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. The ductwork is automatically created. 22 Using the same method. the color fill indicates the flow value. it is considered a closed loop.

Branch ductwork in 3D Add an endcap 26 In the plan view.Branch ductwork in 2D Convert duct to flex duct 23 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Convert to Flex Duct. and select the top left diffuser. A portion of the rigid ductwork is converted to Flex Duct. 25 Press Esc. 106 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . You can ignore the warning. 24 Select the remaining diffusers. zoom in to the open end of the main duct. Revit MEP displays a warning that the flex duct that was created exceeds the Maximum Flex Duct setting in the Mechanical Settings dialog.

29 Click the endpoint snap of the main duct. 28 Select Rectangular Endcap : Standard from the Type Selector drop-down.To ensure that the system has proper flow propagation and accurate system calculations. you need to add an endcap to create a closed loop. and then click Modify. 30 Press Esc twice. and click to select it. 33 Click on the main duct below the top set of diffusers as shown. 27 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Duct Fitting. Size ductwork 34 Highlight a section of the main duct (which is now split). Manually Creating Ductwork | 107 . Endcap in 3D Split and size main duct 31 Maximize the plan view. 32 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Split. press Tab to highlight the entire main duct run.

under Constraints. The ductwork is sized to provide appropriate CFM value for the system. select a segment of the main duct. 40 Using the same method. and click OK. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. 37 Press Esc to clear the selection. Verify duct sizing 38 In the drawing area. verify the flow rate for the remaining segments of the main duct. 108 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . under Mechanical . clear Restrict Height. and click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Flow. and then click OK. This height constraint is used when you place duct in a restricted space.35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. 36 In the Duct Sizing dialog. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. verify that the value is the total of the diffusers supplied by that segment of duct. such as a plenum.Airflow.

Create return and supply piping systems. you create the systems and piping to logically and physically connect the system components. This system is modeled to accommodate full system flow through a boiler.Designing a Mechanical Piping System 6 In this lesson. Then. including 2 base mounted pumps. and a cooling tower located on the roof. In this lesson. Use the System Browser to review the piping systems. 109 . you learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment. you create a hydronic piping system that is designed to run in a cooling mode and a heating mode. using modulating valves to divert through the cooling tower during cooling mode. additional water source heat pumps from level 1. You begin the piping system design by placing water source heat pumps and a boiler on level 3 of the building model. or to bypass the cooling tower during heating mode. Add valves to allow the overall piping system to work in 2 modes: cooling and heating. Automatically and manually lay out piping. Use a color-coded display to verify and adjust pipe sizing. Inspect and validate the piping systems and physical connections.

including 2 water source heat pumps (WSHP) and a condensing boiler. 110 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . on level 3 of the building model. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_01_i. click Training Files.rvt.Level 3 mechanical piping system Adding Mechanical Equipment In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. you place mechanical equipment. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

Design is highlighted. 4 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. in corridor 328.2-6 Tons .Right Discharge : 6 Ton from the Type Selector drop-down. as shown. 5 Press Spacebar to rotate the component. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 111 .High Efficiency . 2 Zoom in to the right side of the shorter building wing. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. verify that Wall faces is selected. 7 On the Options Bar.Horizontal . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . A tooltip and the status bar (located at the lower left of the window) confirm the space name and number.Left Return . and click to place it in the shorter wing of the building. and select WSHP . you can identify a space by placing the cursor over the space component.HVAC Plan .Adding air side equipment 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . indicating that it’s the active view. NOTE Although space tags are not included in this view.

9 Click Place Dimensions tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 11 Press Enter and then press Esc. 13 Place another WSHP to the left of the one you just placed. as shown. as shown. 10 Select the WSHP. click the top edge of the WSHP. and click to place the dimension. (Use the alignment sketch graphics to position the second WSHP the same distance from the corridor wall as the first. and enter 2'. verify that the WSHP is still selected.) 112 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . click the dimension.8 Click the corridor wall face. and in the Type Selector. 12 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.

Adding Mechanical Equipment | 113 . above and to the left of the Base Mounted Pump. for Offset. Under Mechanical. 17 Press Esc to clear the selection. 20 Press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the component. Click OK. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. select the 2 WSHPs. for Water Flow.14 Click Modify. enter 9'. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. as shown. 19 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. Modify WSHP parameters 15 While pressing Ctrl. and select Condensing Boiler : 500 MBH from the Type Selector drop-down. Add water side equipment 18 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. enter 12 GPM. and click to place it in the mechanical room.

114 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Create pipes to physically connect the system components. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. including flow and pressure. and use the System Browser to review and confirm the systems. A system is the logical connection between system components such as water source heat pumps (WSHPs) and a boiler. you create the return and supply piping systems. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. Create the logical connection between the system components. The recommended workflow to create piping systems is to: ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment and other system components. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses.21 Click Modify.

Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. and expand the Default Hydronic Supply 1 and the Default Hydronic Return 1 systems to view the mechanical equipment placed in the building. 5 In the System Browser. Creating a Piping System | 115 .Design is highlighted. You can create pipes to connect system components. In the left pane of the Open dialog. where it is easier to review the information.Mech 330).Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_02_i. This display option allows you to simplify the browser view by showing only the Piping discipline. Unlike logical connections (systems). and click View ➤ Piping. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Chilled water supply system: 2 WSHPs and a cooling tower Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. but without a corresponding system.IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. 6 Expand the Unassigned folder. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . 4 Click the titlebar for the System Browser window.HVAC Plan . and drag the window down so it displays along the bottom of the screen. click Training Files. right-click the Systems column heading.rvt. analyses cannot be performed. indicating that it’s the active view.

Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Return and Default Hydronic Supply systems category located in the Unassigned folder. A red dashed line connects the 2 WSHPs in the drawing. Therefore. for System Name. enter CHWR to represent Chilled Water Return. Assigning a system component to an existing system. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. the System Equipment is Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. select one of the WSHPs that you added to the system to activate this tool and the other options on the Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. 10 On the Options Bar.In the System Browser. select the 2 WSHPs. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. 12 In the drawing area. Notice that on the Options Bar. You assign a system component to a system either by: ■ ■ Creating a logical connection (system) between the system components. This display indicates that the system is selected. while pressing Ctrl. select the boiler. leaving a large number of components in a default system can hinder performance and prevent accurate calculations for the systems where they should have been assigned. 9 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. After you placed the WSHPs and boiler. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. 116 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . As you assign equipment to systems. the assigned equipment moves from the Unassigned folder to the respective assigned system folder. Equipment that remains in a default system is included in heating and cooling loads calculations. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Return. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to a system. Create the hydronic return piping system 7 In the drawing area. 11 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. IMPORTANT All mechanical equipment in the project should be assigned to a system other than a default system. and the Edit System tool is not active.

17 On the Options Bar. 21 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. 15 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Supply. for System Name. Creating a Piping System | 117 . enter CHWS to represent Chilled Water Supply. double-click Roof . Notice that the Hydronic Return option does not display because the selected component already has a hydronic return system assigned to it. 18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System.Design.Design ➤ Floor Plans. (You can click the Piping Systems tab to access the Return System properties. and select the cooling tower. Create the hydronic supply piping system 14 Select one of the WSHPs that you placed previously. under Design ➤ HVAC . and select the second WSHP to add it to the supply system.) 16 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. You have created the hydronic return system. 20 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System.13 Click Finish Editing System.HVAC Plan . 19 In the Project Browser.

The CHWS system contains the 2 WSHPs and the cooling tower. the water returns through the boiler into the cooling tower by way of the WSHPs. and click Expand All. You select the boiler as equipment for supply to the WSHPs. Confirm and validate the systems 27 In the System Browser. select Connector 1 : Undefined : Round : 4'' : Cooling Water Supply In. the boiler supplies heated water to the system. the cooling tower provides cooled water to the system. 23 Close the roof plan view. 29 Right-click CHWS. and click Select. 26 Click Finish Editing System. 25 Select the boiler. 28 Using the same method. right-click the Hydronic Supply system category. In heating mode.22 In the Select Connector dialog. and click OK. Notice that the Options Bar indicates 3 for the Number of Elements. indicating the logical connection. The boiler is the only equipment that has connectors with compatible system types (hydronic supply and hydronic return). and bypasses the cooling tower. IMPORTANT The new system named CHWS is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply ➤ Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. expand the Hydronic Return system category. The hydronic supply system highlights in red. You can now view the systems hierarchy: CHWR and CHWS logically connect the boiler (parent) with the WSHPs (children). In cooling mode. 24 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 118 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

You also manually modify the layout path as required. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout In this exercise. and click OK. you can view several parameters. under Mechanical. expand Piping. You can select the columns that you want to display in the System Browser. 33 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Properties. enter 18 GPM. and click OK. 31 In the Column Settings dialog.In the System Browser. for Water Flow. The CHWS Flow value is updated in the System Browser. and click Column Settings. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 119 . right-click the Flow value for one of the WSHPs in the CHWS system. 30 Right-click the Systems column heading. 32 In the System Browser. select Fluid Type and Fluid Temperature. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. including the flow rate and size of the component. you create the physical connections in the pipe system automatically using the Generate Layout tool.

the boiler. click Check None. TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering. You use an alternate method of selecting the system in the next steps. then the Select a System dialog displays. 120 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 2 Beginning outside the building at the upper left corner. 4 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_03_i.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 10 Click OK. The layout path solutions display with the main in blue and the branch in green. and click to select it.Design is highlighted. and then click OK to create a layout for the currently selected system. Create the Level 3 return pipe layout 7 Select a WSHP. select Mechanical Equipment. and click OK.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.rvt. select CHWR. 9 In the Select a System dialog. you can place the cursor over a system component. Select components with the Filter tool 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. When you draw a box to select components. 5 In the Filter dialog. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection.HVAC plan view range are highlighted. and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors). The level 3 water source heat pumps (WSHPs). You select a system in the dialog to view it in the drawing. press Tab to highlight the system. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. Revit MEP provides several solutions from which to choose. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and the 2 base mounted pumps are selected (and display in red).Mech 330). In the left pane of the Open dialog. Notice that all components within the Level 3 .HVAC Plan . drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a selection box around the floor plan. 3 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout. A system preview displays in red. indicating that it’s the active view.

You can modify this value for the main and branch elevations. ■ ■ Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 121 . Click (Next Solution) until solution 4 of 5 is selected. select Perimeter. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. you can change the pipe type and the vertical offset at which the piping will automatically be created. or architectural components. verify that Solutions is selected. 12 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog.11 On the Options Bar. structural beams. verify that the Offset value for the Main and for the Branch is 10' 0''. 15 On the Options Bar: ■ For Solution Type. click Settings. The perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. enter 1' 6''. IMPORTANT The branch offset lets you automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. 14 On the Generate Layout tab. 13 Click Cancel. This functionality is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. duct. It does not reference the architecture. For Inset.

122 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . View the Status Bar to verify the branch option currently displayed. Branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment. the Status Bar displays the components being highlighted: ■ ■ ■ Branch in a pipe network. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. 19 In the drawing area. Branch in a pipe network including the branch objects. Verify the flow In a previous exercise. you modified the flow value for the WSHPs. select the pipe connecting the WSHP on the right to the boiler. to display the path with thinner lines. 18 Place the cursor over the piping.16 Click Finish Layout. The piping is automatically created along with the appropriate connectors and fittings so that all of the piping segments are connected to equipment. With each Tab. and press Tab 3 times. the flow for one WSHP is 18. 17 Optionally. and the flow for the other is 12.

The flow from the 2 WSHPs travels into the boiler. and access its instance properties. under Mechanical. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 123 . This value indicates the total of the flow for the 2 WSHPs (18 GPM + 12 GPM). Add the Level 1 WSHPs to the return system 25 Select the WSHP on the left.The flow through this pipe should equal the flow of both WSHPs. 22 Select the boiler. 20 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and click OK. and click OK. verify that the value for Flow is 30 GPM. 24 Press Esc. 23 Under Mechanical. notice that the Water Flow is 30 GPM.

On the Options Bar. 28 In the Project Browser. which propagates flow throughout the system. 27 On the System Tools panel. 30 Draw a selection window to select the 6 WSHPs.HVAC Plan . click Edit System. the Number of Elements is now 8. double-click Level 1 . Next. you physically close the CHWR loop. 124 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . the Level 1 WSHPs are connected to the chilled water return system (CHWR). and verify that CHWR is selected from the System Selector drop-down. 33 Zoom in to the piping that comes from the floor below. and zoom to fit the drawing in the view. Physically connect the multi-level WSHPs Previously.Design.26 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. you logically added Level 1 WSHPs to the CHWR System. 31 Close the Level 1 plan view. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 29 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Logically. 32 Click Finish Editing System.

and the flow coming from Level 1 is 95 GPM. NOTE For the purposes of this tutorial. 37 In the Instance Properties dialog. so the total flow of 125 GPM indicates that the flow has propagated correctly. The Level 3 WSHPs generate a flow of 30 GPM. access its instance properties. extend the pipe to the left until it connects to the center line of the existing pipe at the horizontal and nearest snap. The fittings are automatically created to connect to the return piping coming from below.34 Select the bottom piece of horizontal pipe. Verify the flow from the lower level 36 With the new pipe selected. and then close the Instance Properties dialog. under Mechanical. review the properties for the boiler to verify that the Water Flow value is 125 GPM. 38 Using the same method. as shown. note that the value for Flow is 95 GPM. Manually modify piping in layout mode 39 In the drawing area. the 6 WSHPs from Level 1 have already been added to the chilled water supply system (CHWS). select a WSHP. and click Cancel. and then click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 125 . 35 Using the drag control.

Click Settings. enter 1' 6''. select CHWS. 126 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and then click OK. ■ ■ 43 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Remove. The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. For Slope. enter 0''/12''.40 In the Select a System dialog. select Perimeter 1 of 5. enter 9' 6'' for both the Main Offset and the Branch Offset. 41 Click OK. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. 44 Click the boiler to remove it from the layout path solution. 45 Click the supply pipe from the cooling tower above. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Solution Type. For Inset.

46 Click Modify. select the vertical sketch line just above the one you already selected. you connect the boiler to parallel-connected base mounted pumps. (Both sections are at the same elevation. as shown. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 127 .The boiler and cooling tower are no longer included in the layout path.) 49 Select the 4-way arrow control. as shown. 48 While pressing Ctrl. In a later exercise. 47 In the drawing area. and drag it to the left (just to the right of the double door in the underlay). select the right vertical green sketch line in the path.

or offset elevations are incorrect. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel to the system. select the short vertical path line connecting the right WSHP (in the same location as the short segment of pipe). Either relocate the system components. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe.50 Using the same method. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ Connect the boiler to the return piping. 128 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Connect the cooling tower into the supply system to maintain the closed loop. or manually modify the pipe. Add piping to close the supply loop. you manually lay out piping to create a closed loop system. You tile a plan view and a 3D view to simultaneously create the pipe (physical) connections and validate the pipe geometry. and drag it to the right to align it with the sketch lines you just moved. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. select a different layout solution. To create the piping system. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout In this exercise. NOTE Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. 51 Click Finish Layout.

and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_04_i. 2 Under Design ➤ HVAC . 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Sometimes (such as during vertical alignment) it’s easier to select components in 3D. In the left pane of the Open dialog.NOTE Default color filters for the Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return have already been specified for this project in the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. As you work in the training file. click Training Files. double-click 3D HVAC Building.rvt.Design ➤ 3D Views. 4 Adjust the view in both windows (use the ViewCube and Zoom tools) to see the connections on the boiler. and the return pipes are magenta. as shown. indicating that it’s the active view. You may find it helpful to view the system in both plan and 3D during design and validation. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 129 .Design is highlighted. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. you will notice that the supply pipes are dark purple.HVAC Plan .

7 In the plan view. draw a selection window around the elbow fitting and the small piece of pipe connecting into the boiler return connector. select the section of piping. 6 Press Delete. as shown.Modify return piping to accommodate supply piping 5 In the 3D view. 130 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

8 Move the piping: ■ ■ Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. 10 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. ■ Click to move the piping. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 131 . ■ Move the cursor up 4''. and press Esc to clear the selection. select the boiler. Click to specify the reference point. 9 In the 3D view.

11 In the Select Connector dialog. Using the Connect Into tool ensures that if the connection is successful. The top base mounted pump in the plan view is primary. 14 Right-click the grip that represents the supply connector (top). flow will propagate through the connecting pipe and be assigned to the appropriate system based on the connector to which it is connected. select the return pipe riser. An automatic flow valve will be used to direct the flow from the boiler to the 2 pumps. 12 In the 3D view. and click Draw Pipe. 132 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and the lower one is secondary. and click OK. Plan view of return piping connection to the boiler Connect the primary base mounted pump to the boiler Two base mounted pumps are included in the system.You use this tool on components with connectors to automatically create piping between the component and the existing system. select the boiler. The connections are automatically created. 13 In the plan view. and the boiler is connected to the return piping. click Connector 2 : Hydronic Return : Round : 2'' : Cold Water In. The tool also automatically creates the appropriate fittings.

and click just before the midway point on the primary base mounted pump.7''. enter 1' . and press Enter. 15 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. the Select Connector dialog displays prompting you to select the return or the supply connector. 16 Press Spacebar to acquire offset and pipe diameter values from the connector. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 133 . and you select 1 connector. ■ Move the cursor down. and select Pipe Types: Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. if a component has 2 connectors that are not connected to piping. You can input dimensions as you draw pipe to ensure specific length segments. for Offset.In a plan view. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. enter 2'. Add another 2' section of pipe to the right. 17 Draw the piping: ■ Move the cursor to the right.

select the primary base mounted pump. 21 In the Select Connector dialog. 20 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 19 In the plan view. Upgrade a fitting 23 Zoom in to the elbow fitting. and select it. Notice in the 3D view that the specified offset dropped the horizontal run down. and the appropriate fittings are created. As you place piping runs that are close together. 22 Select the last segment of pipe you drew. as shown. and click OK. it may be helpful to switch Automatically Connect off to avoid unintended piping connections. 18 Press Esc twice.NOTE The Automatically Connect option attempts to connect piping that is positioned within a specified range. select Connector 2 : Undefined: Round: 3''. 134 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . The pipe is automatically connected to the base mounted pump.

24 Click the bottom plus symbol to upgrade the fitting from an elbow to a tee. NOTE To downgrade from a tee fitting to an elbow. 29 If necessary. right-click the bottom connector. click to connect to the pump. Connect the secondary base mounted pump 25 Select the tee fitting. zoom out in the 3D view to see the new connections. and click to draw the pipe. 28 Press Esc. and when the connector point displays. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 135 . and click Draw Pipe. 27 Move the cursor to the right. you select the tee fitting. 26 Move the cursor down until the Status Bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection of the base mounted pump. and click the minus symbol.

31 On the Options Bar. 136 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 32 Move the cursor down until it joins the connector point on the secondary base mounted pump. 33 Press Esc. select the primary base mounted pump. for Offset. enter 4'. right-click the discharge connector. and click to create the pipe. and click Draw Pipe.Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel 30 In the plan view.

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 137 . 35 Using the method learned previously. upgrade the fitting to a tee connector.Notice that you do not have to draw the 2 vertical pipes to connect to the pumps. these pipe connections were created automatically. 3D view of parallel-connected base mounted pumps Add pipe to create a closed loop system 34 In the 3D view. as shown. zoom in to the elbow fitting on the left (secondary) base mounted pump.

138 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . ■ Move the cursor down. select the tee connector in the secondary base mounted pump. for Offset. and press Enter. type 1'.36 Draw pipe to connect the base mounted pipes to the return: ■ In the plan view. and click Draw Pipe. Move the cursor down until the status bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection and vertical with the pipe shown. and click to create the pipe. right-click the bottom control on the tee. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. enter 9' 6''.

you validate the flow through the system. Validate flow propagation through the supply system 38 In the plan view. and click Element Properties. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 139 . right-click. Next. select the pipe from the secondary base mounted pump to the supply pipe. You now have a closed loop system.37 Click Modify.

select the cooling tower. The Flow Factor for the primary pump is set to 50% also. Flow is not currently passing through the cooling tower because it is not yet connected to the hydronic piping system. and click Element Properties. In the Instance Properties dialog. ■ Upper pipe going to the cooling tower (inlet). 40 Click Cancel. right-click. notice that Flow is 125 GPM. Connect the cooling tower Next. the value is 0 GPM. as shown. 41 Using the same method. 45 In the Instance Properties dialog. 140 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . view the properties for the secondary pump.50 or 50% of the Flow. 48 In the plan view. select the following pipes: ■ Supply pipe. under Mechanical. notice that the Flow Factor is a parameter that is . which is rounded up to 63 GPM (1/2 of 125 GPM). you physically connect the cooling tower piping to propagate flow. 43 Press Esc. 42 Click OK. The flow is being propagated through the piping. you can specify the Flow Factors for the 2 pumps as any combination that adds up to 100%. and click OK. 44 In the 3D view. When you create the pumps in parallel. under Mechanical. The cooling tower propagates flow through the inlet and outlet connectors.39 In the Instance Properties dialog. notice that under Mechanical. for Cooling Water Flow. 47 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend drop-down ➤ Trim/Extend Multiple Elements. 46 Press Esc.

Both pipes for the cooling tower are automatically connected to the piping system. 49 Press Esc.■ Lower pipe (outlet). Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 141 . NOTE Piping colors update based on specified filters.

142 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and is heated by the boiler. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 51 Verify that the value for Cooling Water Flow is 125 GPM. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. Adding Valves In this exercise. and open the Instance Properties dialog to validate that the flow is propagating correctly through the cooling tower. You add a bypass valve to stop the flow and direct it to the cooling tower (cooling mode). the water bypasses the cooling tower. When the valve is open. you add valves to model the piping for 2 modes: cooling mode and heating mode. and close the dialog. select the cooling tower.rvt.50 In the 3D View. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_05_i. You also add shut-off valves to control the flow to and from the cooling tower.

7 Click the center of the pipe to place the valve. 3 Click the section of pipe between the supply in and supply out pipes to the cooling tower. Rotate the valve 9 Select the valve. as shown. verify that the Diameter value is 3''.Design is highlighted. 8 Press Esc twice. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. 6 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Element panel.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . The bypass valve is closed by default. 4 On the Options Bar. and select Ball Valve . and click the top Rotate control to rotate the valve to a horizontal position.HVAC Plan . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down.Place a bypass valve to control flow to the cooling tower 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE Be careful to select a bypass valve in this step. indicating that it’s the active view. Adding Valves | 143 . 5 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory.

15 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 13 Click to place the valve at the midpoint of the supply pipe to the cooling tower. parallel to the previously placed valve. 14 Using the same method. 12 Select Ball Valve . place another Ball Valve . 144 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .2-6 Inch : 4'' from the Type Selector drop-down.2-6 Inch Bypass : 4'' valve on the return pipe for the cooling tower. Place shut-off valves 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory.10 Press Esc.

you want to shut off the flow of water into the cooling tower. 20 Select the bypass valve.Rotate both valves 16 Click the top Rotate control to the left of each valve to rotate the valve as shown. verify that Flow is 0 GPM. and click OK. Adding Valves | 145 . right-click. 19 Using the same method. Add valves to facilitate a dual mode system 17 Select the small piece of pipe above the bypass valve. For the top horizontal pipe (flow to the cooling tower). You bypass the cooling tower with hot water coming from the boiler. (This valve allows the water to flow through it. validate that the Flow value is 0 GPM. For the bottom horizontal pipe (flow from the cooling tower). validate that the Flow is 125 GPM. Modify valves to bypass the cooling tower Currently the system is designed to run in cooling mode. and select Ball Valve .) 21 Select the 2 regular valves (in open position). In heating mode. validate that the Flow is 125 GPM. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog. You add valves to the cooling tower to enable the system to alternately run in heating mode.2-6 Inch : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. validate the following flow values: ■ ■ ■ For the pipe below the bypass valve. and click Element Properties. under Mechanical. and select Ball Valve .2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down.

click Training Files. Initially. The flow traveling through the bypass section of pipe is 125 GPM. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Pipe Legend. The flow coming out of the cooling tower is 0 GPM. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 146 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . validate the following: ■ ■ ■ The flow going into the cooling tower is 0 GPM. as shown. You then use a combination of friction and velocity to size the pipes appropriately.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . indicating that it’s the active view. Display the pipe color scheme legend 1 In the Project Browser.22 Using the method you just learned. you use the pipe color scheme legend as a color-coded reference to view the flow within the pipes and the sizing. Sizing Pipe In this exercise.Design is highlighted. The color-coded display allows you to quickly see differing sizes and flow of piping. you verify automatically calculated pipe size and flow parameters. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_06_i. 3 Click to place the color scheme legend in the area to the right of the piping system.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 23 Close the file with or without saving it.HVAC Plan .

and click OK.4 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. 8 Press Esc to clear the selection.Size. This display will help you size the pipe using friction and velocity sizing methods. and click Modify Pipe Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. This option displays the pipes in colors based on flow values. and click OK. Sizing Pipe | 147 . click Pipe Color Fill . 5 Compare the legend to the color coding in the drawing to verify that the flow values are as expected. 7 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. for Schemes. Display the color fill based on pipe size 6 Select the Color Scheme Legend.Flow. select Pipe Color Fill .

and click to select the branch. select Larger of Connector and Calculated. Click OK. Select And. select Friction. 12 In the Pipe Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. 148 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. press Tab 3 times (so that the status bar indicates that you’ve highlighted a branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment). IMPORTANT The Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. enter 5 FPS. Under Constraints. 13 Press Esc. and for Velocity.25 FT/100ft. for Branch Sizing. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. The piping increases in diameter based on the friction and velocity values specified.Size the pipe using friction and velocity methods 9 Zoom in to the section of pipe connecting the boiler to the parallel base mounted pumps. and enter 2. 10 Move the cursor over the pipe between the primary and secondary base mounted pumps.

Inspect the system 1 In the Project Browser. Using the System Inspector. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. Inspecting the System | 149 .Design ➤ 3D Views. 2 Select the section of the return piping (magenta) between the 2 water source heat pumps on the upper level. Either relocate the system components. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 14 Close the file with or without saving it. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. or offset elevations are incorrect. Inspecting the System In this exercise. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_07_i. or manually modify the pipe. and double-click 3D HVAC Building. you use the System Inspector to inspect the Level 3 hydronic piping system. you can easily detect problem areas in your design and resolve them immediately.rvt.IMPORTANT Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . pressure. select a different layout solution. click Training Files. The System Inspector lets you inspect each piping system for flow. and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system.

The critical flow (indicated by red arrows) is in the main line going to the boiler. the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected.3 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. 150 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 5 Place the cursor over the same section of return piping. This information helps you modify the system design. and pressure information including pressure loss. An inspection flag reports the section number. 4 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. NOTE Zoom in to the piping to see the arrows clearly. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe. The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system. as required. flow.

67 psi. 7 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Properties. Note that the Flow is 80 GPM.65 psi and the Pressure Loss is 1. as shown. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. and the Pressure Loss is 1. select 90° F. In this exercise.89 psi.Modify fluid temperature 6 Place the cursor over the section of pipe (Section 6) between the 2 WSHPs on the lower level. Checking Piping Systems | 151 . 9 Using the same method.88 psi. and notice that the Static Pressure is 7. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to quickly check these connections for all systems throughout your project. 10 Click Finish. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. and click OK. Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. inspect Section 6 again. targeting those systems that need attention. you need to validate them. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open. and to size pipe. the Static Pressure is 7. for Fluid Temperature.

Revit MEP moves them from the Unassigned folder to their assigned systems folder. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 4 In the System Browser. and double-click Level 3 . the pipe is associated with that system.HVAC Plan . expand the Hydronic Supply folder and notice that the Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH is listed. double-click Level 1 . Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations.rvt. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Pipe Systems. all system components must be assigned to a system after they are placed. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project. In the System Browser. NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. The dashed red lines represent the logical connection. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . As you learned when placing components. Notice that these warnings indicate that the Default systems are not empty. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is: default system is not empty. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display not empty warnings. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. 8 Expand Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. After you have assigned all components to systems. 5 Verify that Systems and Piping are selected. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked.Design.HVAC Plan . Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. 6 In the Project Browser. Warnings display. 152 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). After you assign components to a system. right-click the Systems titlebar. Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. and for pipe sizing. you assigned a water source heat pump to a supply hydronic system. click Training Files. and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations. Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser. under which the mechanical equipment that was assigned to the system is listed. the water source heat pump is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Sanitary system in the Unassigned folder. and click View. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. You will check the mechanical piping components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm specified and default system assignments.Design ➤ Floor Plans. but the same component has a sanitary system connector that you have not assigned to a system. This occurs when the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. thus assigning the components to a system. and click Show to view all of the system components.Design ➤ Floor Plans. For example. 7 In the System Browser. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views.Design. notice the CHWS (Chilled Water Supply System) is listed.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. If you place components without assigning them to a system. 9 Right-click CHWS.

14 Using the methods that you learned. 10 Using the same methods. confirm the system and the system assignments for the Hydronic Supply system. and click Expand All. 12 In the System Browser. click Close. otherwise. 11 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down. and confirm unassigned system components. 15 Close the file with or without saving it.HVAC Plan . expand the Unassigned folder. The return system that you created (CHWR) is listed along with the boiler and the water source heat pumps (WSHPs) that you assigned to this system. and select Level 3 . Checking Piping Systems | 153 . right-click Hydronic Return. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components.TIP If you have multiple views open. 13 Right-click CHWR.Design floor plan. You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems.

154 .

Creating an Electrical System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design an electrical system. 155 .

156 .

You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Specify electrical settings. Color fill plan with required lighting levels ■ Create a space lighting analysis schedule 157 . Assign space color fills according to required lighting levels.Planning an Electrical System 7 In this lesson. Define required lighting. you complete the planning tasks associated with creating an electrical system.

■ ■ For Factor. distribution systems. enter THHN. speeding up the design phase.Wire Sizes. enter 1. You also add a wiring type.04. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Wiring . For Material. select Copper. 158 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . In this exercise you review electrical settings. ■ ■ For Material.Specifying Electrical Settings Electrical settings determine the voltages. and demand factors that are applied in the design. select Copper.rvt. Add a wiring type 3 In the left pane. wiring. Revit MEP checks to ensure that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems. and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_01_i. ■ Click New Correction Factor. click Training Files. select 90. Click OK. 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. For Temperature Rating. click (Open). For Temperature. As you place components and create circuits. 4 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. Add a correction factor 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. select Wiring Types. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Select Correction Factor. select 75.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Insulation, select THHN. For Max Size, enter 2000. For Neutral Multiplier, enter 1.0. Select Neutral Required. For Neutral Size, select Hot Conductor Size. For Conduit Type, select Steel.

Add a voltage definition 5 In the left pane, select Voltage Definitions. The Voltage Definitions table is used to specify a range of voltages that are used with your voltage definitions. By specifying a range, you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. 6 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 240. For Value, enter 240. For Minimum, enter 220. For Maximum, enter 250.

Add a distribution system 7 In the left pane, select Distribution Systems. Note the 3 distribution systems listed. 8 Click Add and in the Electrical settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 120/240. For Phase, select Single. For Wires, select 3. For L-L Voltage, select 240. For L-G Voltage, select 120.

Specify demand factors 9 In the left pane, select Demand Factors. You can specify demand factors that let you adjust the rating of the main service for the building. 10 In the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Load Classification, select Power. Under More Than, select 10000 VA. Click Split. Select 20000 VA and for Demand Factor, enter 50. Click OK.

11 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a schedule to define required lighting levels. Then you assign lighting levels to spaces.

Specifying Electrical Settings | 159

Defining Required Lighting
In this exercise, you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building, such as offices, restrooms, and conference rooms. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level), then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. In this case the key style is the type of space and, because the key is linked to your new project parameter, its value becomes the Required Lighting Level. Later in the tutorial, you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_02_i.rvt.

Add a project parameter for lighting 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Required Lighting Level. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type of Parameter, select Illuminance. For Group Parameter Under, select Electrical - Lighting. Under Categories, select Spaces. Verify that Instance is selected. Click OK twice. The Required Lighting Level project parameter has been added and will appear as an instance parameter for all spaces, under the Electrical - Lighting group in the space element properties.

Verify the new parameter 4 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 5 In the drawing area, zoom in on the lower left corner and use the crosshair as a guide to select Space 218.

6 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

160 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

7 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Electrical - Lighting, note the Required Lighting Level parameter. Click OK. Create a schedule for required lighting levels 8 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 9 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Requirements. Select Schedule Keys, and for Key Name, enter Lighting Levels. Click OK.

10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click Required Lighting Level, and click OK. The schedule displays and includes a title and column headings. 11 Double-click the column boundary to the right of each column to adjust the column to fit the text.

Add space lighting requirements to the schedule table 12 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New. 13 In the Key Name column of the first row, enter Open Office. 14 In the first row of the Required Lighting Level column, enter 45. 15 Adjust the column boundaries as needed.

16 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New to add 13 more rows. 17 Complete the table by entering the following:

The fc value is automatically applied as the parameter is based upon illuminance parameter type, which is mapped to project units. Notice that as you enter the data, the rows are automatically sorted by Key Name. You can change the sort/grouping to sort by Required Lighting Level.

Defining Required Lighting | 161

Change the sort order of the schedule 18 Right-click in the schedule and click View Properties. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

For Sort By, select Required Lighting Level. Select Blank Line.

21 Click OK twice. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Required Lighting Level.

22 Using the same method, change the sort order back to the default setting. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Key Name. Apply a lighting level to spaces 23 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 24 Zoom to Space 218 and select the space element.

25 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Note that under Electrical-Lighting, that Required Lighting Level is blank. 26 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Lighting Levels, select Instruction-Standard. Notice that the Required Lighting Level now has a value of 50 fc and the field is dimmed, since the Lighting Level is set to use the value assigned to the Instruction-Standard key value. The

162 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

only way to change the value is to either select a different Lighting Level key, select None for Lighting Level and type a specific value, or edit the Required Lighting Level key schedule for the selected key. Since Required Lighting Level is an instance parameter, the value input applies only to the selected space. 27 Click OK. You can apply a key schedule to multiple spaces at the same time by selecting the spaces and specifying the lighting levels in the Electrical properties dialog.

28 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a color fill scheme for space lighting.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules
Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. Space color fill plans and schedules can be helpful as design tools and as design communications documents. In this exercise, you will create a space color fill plan using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists for the space components. Later in this exercise, you create a space lighting analysis schedule to aid in the layout of your lighting design. The schedule includes a calculated lighting delta value, which is the difference between the required and the calculated illuminance values. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_03_i.rvt.

Create a color fill legend scheme 1 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Color Schemes. 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Schemes, for Category, select Spaces. Under Schemes, click (Duplicate).

3 In the New Color Scheme dialog, for Name, enter Required Lighting and click OK. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Scheme Definition, for Title, enter Required Lighting Levels. For Color, select Required Lighting Level, and click OK to dismiss the alert message.

5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:

Under Scheme Definition, verify the By Range is selected.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 163

Select the scheme for At Least 20.00 fc, and click (Add Value). This command adds a new value based on the split value of the unit you are adding the new value after. For example, if you select the value for 20 fc and click Add, then the new value will be 40 fc. If you select the value for 20 fc again and click Add, then the new value will be 30 fc or half of the difference between the two values you are adding.

With the scheme for At Least 20. 00 fc still selected, click

(Add Value) again.

Select the scheme for At Least 40.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

■ ■ ■

Select the scheme for 30.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

Select the scheme for 50.00 fc, enter 75.00, and press ENTER. Select the scheme for 40.00 fc, enter 50.00, and press ENTER.

Click OK.

Add a legend and apply the color scheme 6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting CF. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. 8 In the drawing area, click to place the legend to the right of the drawing. 9 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■ ■

For Space Type, select Spaces. For Color Scheme, select Required Lighting. Click OK.

The color fill plan displays the required illuminance levels based on the key values previously created.

164 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

Create a space lighting analysis schedule 10 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 11 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Analysis and click OK.

12 In the Schedule Properties dialog, for Available Fields, double-click Number, Name, Level, Average Estimated Illumination, and Required Lighting Level. 13 Click Calculated Value. 14 In the Calculated Value dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Lighting Delta. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type, select Illuminance. For Formula, click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Average Estimated Illumination. Click OK.

In the Calculated Value dialog, for Formula, at the end of Average Estimated Illumination, press the spacebar, type a hyphen, and click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Required Lighting Level. Click OK twice.

15 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Level. Select Header. Select Blank Line. On the Formatting tab, for Fields, select Lighting Delta. Click Conditional Format.

In the Conditional Formatting dialog, under Condition, for Test, select Not Between.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 165

■ ■ In the Color dialog. select Red.■ ■ For Value. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. The lighting delta values that are not within the conditional value of -5 fc and 5 fc are highlighted in red. 166 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . enter -5 fc and 5 fc. for Custom Colors. Click OK three times. Click Background Color.

You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add devices and fixtures using schedule to satisfy required lighting levels. Create circuits (with and without wire) to create the logical connections between devices and fixtures. and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components.Designing an Electrical System 8 In this lesson. Balance wire sizes and breaker service. using the color fill plan and the space analysis schedule as an aid in lighting placement to satisfy required lighting levels. Use the System Browser to check your design. you verify illuminance values to indicate when the lighting level requirements have been satisfied. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills In this exercise. Create power loads. you place lighting fixtures in the drawing. you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits. First. you modify the color plan to illustrate the space by the Average Estimated Illumination values. 167 . Then. Create a panel schedule. power circuits. as you place lighting fixtures. These values are based on internal lighting level calculations which use the space floor and wall reflectance values and workplane height to automatically calculate average illuminance or lighting levels.

select Average Estimated Illumination. 3 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_01_i. You can create additional color schemes. Click OK. 168 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 6 Press ESC to deselect the legend. In the left pane of the Open dialog.00 fc.Lighting Color Fill view is open. select the color for Less Than 20.rvt. for Basic Colors. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ Under Schemes. then modify the color scheme legend to use the color fill plan as a design tool for many tasks. click Training Files. click (Open). 2 In the drawing area.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.00 fc. select Orange. ■ ■ ■ 5 Click OK. for the Spaces Category. select the color legend. we can quickly identify those areas of the building that do not meet the specified lighting requirements. In the Color dialog. Notice that the Library has an average estimated illumination less than 20. Modify the color fill plan 1 Verify that the Level 2 . Under Scheme Definition. By using orange as the color for this range.

The color fill plan also indicates in orange an illumination value below 20 fc. Windows are arranged in a counter-clockwise order. 11 Click the Space Lighting Analysis view to make it active. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . The schedule indicates the Average Estimated Illumination as yellow for values of 0 fc (conditional format). and the Lighting Delta as red for values out of the +/. indicating a value greater than 0 fc.5 fc range is satisfied.277. 16 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x2’ (2 Lamp) . 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. with the last activated window appearing in the upper-left corner. 9 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.Lighting Ceiling Plan view to make it active. 15 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Lighting Fixture. however the color fill plan can display within the range below the specified value because of the +/. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. The red field will clear once the +/.7 In the Project Browser. All of this works as a visual aid for the designer to insure design requirements are met. 8 In the Project Browser. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 169 . The colors will coincide with the values in the color fill legend.5 fc range specified in the conditional format of this field. zoom to space Library 219.Lighting Ceiling plan. The color fill will change colors as lighting fixtures are placed that raise the illumination level above 20 fc. Add fixtures 14 In the drawing area.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans and open the Level 2 . 17 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. 10 Click the Level 2 Color Fill_Lighting Plan view to make it active. The order of the tiled windows is determined by the order in which the windows were activated. Note that the lighting delta can be cleared.5 fc range. all three of these colored fields will clear to white. the illumination values in the color fill plan and schedule analysis will automatically update. 13 Click the Level 2 . As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. which is the lowest value in the specified range.277VM_Plain Recessed Lighting Fixture 600x600 . expand Schedule/Quantities and open the Space Lighting Analysis view.

170 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 23 Click OK. so that as the ceiling plan moves vertically. verify that the option for Calculate Coefficient of Utilization is selected. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog. 21 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. NOTE This option must be selected in order for lighting information to be updated in the color fill plan and schedule. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 25 On the Options Bar. the lighting delta and average estimated illumination for space Library 219 are updated. the fixtures will move accordingly. 20 Select the lighting fixture. 26 Use the Copy command to place 2 more fixtures as shown.The Place on Face option allows the fixtures to be hosted by the ceiling plan. 24 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. select Multiple. In the Space Lighting Analysis view. 18 Click to place the fixture.

28 In the drawing area. select the 3 fixtures. 29 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 31 Click in the drawing area to place 6 additional groups of fixtures as shown. 27 Press ESC to end the command. select Multiple.NOTE Object snaps are used for selecting intersections of the ceiling grid. 30 On the Options Bar. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 171 .

The values in the Space Lighting Analysis view are updated automatically. 172 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Modify multiple fixture instances 34 Select the vertical center group of light fixtures. Note the value in red for the space Library 219.32 Press ESC. 33 Click to activate the Schedule window.

Click OK. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 173 .35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.277V. 37 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (2 Lamp) . select Lighting Fixtures. click Check None. 36 In the Filter dialog. and for Category.

The values in the schedule are updated automatically. 174 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Note the changes for the space Library 219. 38 Click to activate the Color Fill_Lighting Plan view.

277V. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 175 . click the ceiling grid line as shown. select Multiple Alignment. Note the changes for the space Library 219. 41 On the Options Bar.39 Repeat the previous steps to change the same group of fixtures to Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) . 42 In the drawing area. The lighting delta is satisfied. 40 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align.

176 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .43 Click the left edge of the first fixture. The fixture aligns. 44 Repeat the previous step to align the remaining fixtures.

45 Press ESC to end the command. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures In this exercise. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. 46 Close the file with or without saving it. In the next exercise. you modify the light fixture IES files. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_02_i. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 177 . click (Open). you modify the IES data of the light fixtures with the goal of maximizing the lighting output using the fewest number of fixtures.

4 In the Level 2 Lighting Plan view. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . 6 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Click Edit Type. 2 Tile the views as shown. zoom to space Library 219 and select the lighting fixture shown.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 . scroll to view space space Library 219. Expand Schedules/Quantities and open Space Lighting Analysis. Note the Average Estimated Illumination value of 46 fc. 178 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .Lighting Color Fill plan. 5 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 .Lighting Plan. 3 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule view.Create a new lighting fixture type 1 In the Project Browser.

click the value for Initial Color. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 179 . for Name enter 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W . ■ Under Photometrics.277V and click OK. select 463T5_S. Note that in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule. select T5 [HO]. click the value for Initial Intensity. enter 162.■ In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Duplicate. ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical Loads. In the Name dialog. specify 15000. Click OK. Under Photometrics. enter F15. ■ In the Initial Color dialog. for Apparent Load. for Ballast Loss Factor. select Luminous Flux. 7 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. enter . ■ Click Apply. Under Electrical. enter .00 lm.ies and click Open. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Initial Intensity dialog. Note the lighting type has changed to F14.00 VA. and click OK. click the value for Photometric Web File and click Browse. In the Select File dialog. Under Photometrics. click the value for Light Loss Factor. for Color Preset. for Type Mark. select Xenon and click OK. Apply the lighting fixture type 8 Select all the fixtures in the center column in the Library as shown. ■ Click OK twice. the Lighting Delta for the Library is updated. ■ ■ ■ In the Light Loss Factor dialog. for Lamp.93.85. Under Identity Data. For Luminaire Dirt Depreciation. Under Photometrics.

180 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Remove lighting fixtures 13 Select the 3 lighting fixtures in the center column of the Library as shown. 10 In the Filter dialog. 12 Press ESC to deselect the fixtures. click Check None. Note that the selected lighting fixtures have been updated. select Lighting Fixtures. and for Category. and that the lighting delta for the Library in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule also has been updated. Click OK.277V. 11 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W .

Press Delete. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 181 . Apply the fixture type to other fixtures 14 Click Modify tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Match Type. 15 In space Library 219. select the top center fixture. 16 Click the other fixtures in the center to apply the fixture type. Note the lighting delta updates again.

17 Click Match Fixtures tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. 182 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Remove lighting fixtures 18 Select the 2 lighting fixtures as shown. Note that the lighting delta for the Library has been updated again.

zoom to space Computer Lab 222.Press Delete. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In the next exercise. junction boxes. The procedure for placing switches and receptacles is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. click (Open). click Training Files. and Receptacles | 183 . and Receptacles In this exercise you add switches for the lighting switches and the receptacles in your project. you add switches. Placing Switches. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. Junction Boxes. Place lighting switches 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. The lighting delta has been updated and is now 0. Junction Boxes. 2 In the drawing area. and receptacles to your design. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_03_i.rvt. Placing Switches.

3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 184 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 4 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Wall Occupancy Sensor . 6 Position the switch on the interior wall as shown. 7 Click to place the switch. it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall. 5 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Placement tab ➤ Place on Vertical Face. Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host.Regular Voltage: Passive Infrared .277V.

Placing Switches.NoLoad: 4” Square is selected in the Type Selector. and Receptacles | 185 . 11 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family.rfa and click Open. The element type Junction Boxes .8 Place a second switch of the same type on the other side of the wall as shown. 12 In the Load Family dialog. Select Junction Boxes . 9 Press ESC to end the command. Junction Boxes. browse to Revit MEP ➤ Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices. Place junction boxes 10 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture.NoLoad. 13 Position the junction box in space Computer Lab 222 as shown.

for Level 2 . 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. you can enter a space to separate the unit values. Click OK twice. for Mark. note the Number of Poles is 1. 186 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Click Edit Type. 16 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 21 In the drawing area. zoom to space Library 219. enter 9’0”. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. enter JB-1NL. note that Apparent Load is set to 0. Place wall-hosted receptacles 19 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Power . Under Electrical.Offset. 20 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden to close other views that may be open.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 Power Plan view. 18 Press ESC to deselect the junction box. 15 Select the junction box. In the Type Properties dialog. NOTE When entering values.14 Press ESC to end the command.

Expand Electrical. Click OK. 25 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Check None. Junction Boxes. 24 For any column. Right-click the column heading again and click View ➤ Electrical. Select Load. and Voltage. Expand General. 23 In the System Browser. expand Unassigned and scroll space Library 219. dock the System Browser at the bottom of your window. Select Size. 26 In the System Browser. right-click the a column heading and click View ➤ Systems. Distribution System. Space Number. and Number of Elements. Space Name. Note that the values for the space Library 219 are currently blank. and Receptacles | 187 . NOTE If necessary.22 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. This list displays connectors and circuits that have not been assigned to a panel. right-click and click Column Settings. Placing Switches.

31 Close the System Browser. 30 Scroll the System Browser to see the added receptacles. 35 Select the dimension and enter 12’. 34 Drag the grip to move the witness line to the receptacle on the left as shown. 188 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 29 Click to place 2 receptacles in space Library 219 as shown. Reposition the receptacle 32 Select the receptacle on the right. 33 Position the cursor on the Move Witness Line grip as shown. 28 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard.27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture.

The receptacle on the right is repositioned according to the dimension you enter. Place additional receptacles 37 Repeat the previous steps to place a third receptacle in space Library 219 as shown. Junction Boxes. Placing Switches. 38 Select the receptacle. and Receptacles | 189 . 36 Press ESC to deselect the receptacle. 39 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. select Copy and Multiple. 40 On the Options Bar.

190 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 42 Move the cursor down. enter 12’ and press ENTER to place another receptacle. move the cursor along the wall. and enter 12’ and press ENTER.41 Click the midpoint of the receptacle.

and Receptacles | 191 .43 Press ESC to end the command. Placing Switches. Junction Boxes.

46 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. 45 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 47 Click to place 3 floor receptacles as shown.Place floor-hosted receptacles 44 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 192 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

Next you create lighting circuits and show wire.48 Close the file with or without saving it. Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 193 . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan. you need to create logical connections to define the topology.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. click (Open). click Training Files. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Electrical Equipment. 2 In the drawing area. then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. 194 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .rvt. In this exercise you also become more familiar with the wiring settings. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. zoom to the space Electrical 220. Adding wiring to a project is optional. and work toward the higher voltage. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_04_i. Add panelboards 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP). You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2).equipment.

13 Repeat the previous steps to place a 480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . enter PP-2B. #1 Pole Breakers.Surface: 100A. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 195 .Loads. for Distribution System. select 120/208 Wye. 14 Select the panelboard. 12 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. Click OK. 5 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Placement Panel ➤ Place on Vertical Face. 7 Press ESC to end the command. 6 Click to place the panelboard as shown. select 480/277 Wye. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Distribution System. enter 20. for Max.Surface: 100A panelboard as shown. 15 On the Options Bar.4 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select 208V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . For Panel Name. 10 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical . 8 Select the panelboard. 9 On the Options Bar.

Click OK. 23 In the Filter dialog. Note that Apparent Load Phases are dimmed because they are calculated values. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 Lighting Plan view. For Panel Name. select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. and for Category. zoom to space Instruction 221. 196 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Click OK. #1 Pole Breakers. which is the logical connection between the elements. 20 In the drawing area. Add a circuit with wire 19 In the Project Browser.17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . for Max.Loads. 22 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 21 Select all fixtures and switches in the space. enter 20. The blue sketch graphics show the created circuit. enter LP-2B. 24 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. click Check None. ■ 18 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard.

27 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel.25 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 26 Select lighting panel LP-2B. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 197 .

31 Click to place the switch in the drawing area as shown. 32 Press ESC.28 Press ESC to end the command. 30 Click Lighting Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Lighting Switches: Three Way. Add a switch 29 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 198 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 33 Select the switch on the right.

Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 199 . 36 Click the top-left lighting fixture to add to the circuit. 35 Select the left three-way switch.34 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel and select Lighting Switches: Three Way from the Type Selector drop-down. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit.

Click OK. 38 Press ESC to end the command. 42 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 200 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Note that the tick marks are updated to show 4.37 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. for Hot Conductors. and for Category. Next you create circuits without showing wire. click Check None.Loads. select Wires. click (Open). Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire This exercise is similar to the previous exercise in that you create circuits. 43 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . 39 Select all items in space Instruction 221. except without wire. Click OK. enter 2. 40 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 41 In the Filter dialog. 44 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.

5 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 2 In the drawing area. ■ 16 In the System Browser. 17 Scroll down and expand LP-2B. and click View ➤ Systems and Electrical. 15 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ Expand General and review the settings. Rating. Check circuits 11 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. right-click on the Systems heading.rvt. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_05_i. 12 Move the System Browser pane to the bottom of the screen for easier viewing. Click OK. Expand Electrical. 13 In the System Browser. and Voltage Drop are selected.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 9 Select panel LP-2B in space Electrical 220. and then expand circuit 1. 6 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. 8 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Select Panel. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. click Training Files. 14 Right-click on the Systems heading and click Column Settings. Distribution System. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. expand Power. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right and the lighting sensor. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 201 . and verify that Load. Voltage. 4 Right-click the connector and click Create Power Circuit. Add a circuit without wire 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open.

202 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. 30 Close the System Browser. 26 Select the 4 remaining lighting fixtures and the other occupancy sensor in space Computer Lab 222. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. 22 With the junction box still selected.Note the circuit in space Instruction 221. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to a panel. 25 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. change the Voltage to 277V. under Electrical. 23 Move the cursor over one of the adjacent fixtures and click to select it. View circuit information 24 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 20 Select the junction box and click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 28 Select one of the occupancy sensors. 29 Move the cursor over one of the fixtures and press TAB 3 times to view the circuit. 27 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. Click OK. Add additional devices to the circuit 19 In the drawing area. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. 18 Expand circuit 2 and note the devices. Note the addition of the junction box to circuit 2 in the System Browser.

Notice that all 6 lighting fixture tags are updated. 45 Click Modify Label tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. select Lighting Fixture Tag: Standard. click below the first one to place it. Click Tags. 33 In the Tags dialog: ■ ■ For Lighting Fixtures.Add tags to fixtures 31 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. enter FR4. 43 Select the label name and click Modify Label tab ➤ Label panel ➤ Edit Label. Edit tags 42 Select a tag and click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. under Identity Data. 34 Click each of the 6 lighting fixtures in space Computer Lab 222. 37 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 47 In the drawing area. for Type Mark. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 203 . 38 In the Instance Properties dialog. 41 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. 35 Press ESC to end the command. 44 In the Edit Label dialog. Click Yes. click Edit Type. 32 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Deselect Leader. 40 Click OK twice. Click OK. note the label parameters and click Cancel. 46 Click Place Label tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal ➤ Center and Vertical ➤ Top. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. 36 Select the upper-left fixture.

Click Apply and note the label parameters are divided into 2 lines in the drawing area. enter Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. 57 Click Modify Lighting Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ and select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard. Deselect Break and for Suffix. 49 Click Place Label tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. Click Save. 59 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. Click OK. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Wrap between parameters only. 204 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .rfa. select Lighting Fixture Tags. Add tags to remaining fixtures 54 Select all the elements in space Computer Lab 222. 50 Drag the handle on the right side of the tag to resize it by dragging it to the left. Creating a Switch System In this exercise you learn how to create a switch system. Click OK. select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard and click Apply. Next you create a switch system.48 In the Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Category Parameters. Click OK. for File Name. enter a comma. 56 In the Filter dialog. Note the tags are updated in the drawing area. 51 Click ➤ Save As ➤ Family. For Circuit Number. 60 Zoom out to see the tagged fixtures. 52 In the Save As dialog. and click Apply. 53 Click Create tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. select Circuit Number and Switch ID and click Add parameter(s) to label . Note the tag is updated in the drawing area. and for Category. 55 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. click Check None. 58 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. select Break. 61 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating a Switch System | 205 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 11 Highlight the fixture and press TAB 4 times to see the switch system. 9 Select the occupancy sensor. 12 Select the occupancy sensor. 2 In the drawing area. 5 Click Modify Switch System tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 6 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 13 Click Modify Lighting Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Switch ID.rvt. Create a switch system 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. click Training Files. click (Open). 4 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 10 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right of the space. 8 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. Note that the lighting fixture tags for the two fixtures are updated with the Switch ID. Click OK. enter a. under Electrical Lighting. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_06_i.

for switch ID. enter b.Lighting. under Electrical . 16 Select one of the lighting fixtures below the wall. 18 Click Modify Switch Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. 25 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. Note the lighting fixture tags for the 4 fixtures below the wall are updated with the switch ID. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 22 Select the occupancy sensor on the bottom side of the wall. Click OK. 21 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. 19 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 17 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 206 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .15 Press ESC to deselect the occupancy sensor. 20 Select the remaining 3 lighting fixtures. 23 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Switch Properties.

click Check None. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 6 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. click Training Files. 4 In the Filter dialog. click (Open).26 Close the file with or without saving it. select the PP-2B panel. Circuits are used for power. lighting. Next you create a circuit and size wire. Creating Power Loads In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). In the left pane of the Open dialog. Click OK. Creating Power Loads | 207 . and for Category. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_07_i. and data systems. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. 2 In the drawing area. 7 In space Electrical 220. select Electrical Fixtures.rvt. 3 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. zoom to space Instruction 221 and draw a pick box to select all the components in the space. 5 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. Add a circuit 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open.

select Hook Wire Tick Mark. click the minus symbol to delete a tick mark. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. and in the drawing area. 13 Select the wire again. 208 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . and click Open. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Element Properties. 9 Press ESC to deselect the wires. 10 Right-click the wire for the home run to the panel. enter 2. select Wiring. 17 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. 15 In the Load Family dialog.8 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. select Long Wire Tick Mark. Click OK. 19 Click OK.rfa. 12 Press ESC to deselect the wire. Notice the 3 tick marks is changed to 4 tickmarks. select Hook Wire Tick Mark. and in the right pane.Loads. navigate to Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks. 14 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. 18 For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. under Electrical . for Ground Wire Tick Mark. for Hot Conductors.

Creating Power Loads | 209 . 22 In space Electrical 220. select the PP-2B panel. 25 Select the homerun from space Computer Lab 222 and the wire between the first and second receptacle in space Instruction 221. press Tab to display a preview of the circuit wiring.The tick mark for all ground conductors are changed to a hooked tick marks and neutral conductors display as a long tick mark. 24 Press ESC to deselect the wires. 23 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. Combine multiple homeruns into a multi-circuit homerun 20 Highlight one of the receptacles in space Computer Lab 222. as shown. and click to select the circuit. 21 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel.

28 In the drawing area. 27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Wire drop-down ➤ Arc. in space Instruction 221. click the connector of the first receptacle. Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the homerun and the wiring for space Instruction 221 and a double arrowhead to indicate the multi-circuit homeruns. add another wire between the connector on the last receptacle in 221. and then click the connector of the second receptacle as shown. click a point halfway between the first and second receptacle to create an arc. as shown. There are only 3 tick marks 210 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 29 In space Instruction 221.26 Press Delete. and the connector on the nearest receptacle in space Computer Lab 222.

then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Balance circuit loads 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. An additional hot conductor is added to the 221 wiring. click Training Files. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source.rvt. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service | 211 . 30 Add wiring to space Electrical 220. 31 Close the file with or without saving it.on the wiring that extends to the space Computer Lab 222. and connect its wiring to a receptacle in space Instruction 221. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. 2 In the drawing area. Notice the triple arrowhead for the homerun. Next you balance the loads for your design. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_08_i. Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. select panel LP-2B. Finally. 3 In the Electrical space. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. click Open. zoom to space Electrical 220. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded.

10 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit: ■ ■ Scroll down and note the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. B. 5 In the Edit Circuits dialog. 1-#12. and note the value for the Wire Size parameter is now 3-#10. ■ ■ Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel PP-2B. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. 1-#12. and Phase C provides 2028 VA. Notice that the loads on Phase A. Phase B 3636 VA.3616 VA).4 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Circuits. enter 30A. Under Electrical-Loads. while Phase B provides 2004 VA. click Rebalance Loads. for Rating. and C shows an imbalance with the heaviest load 6932 VA on Phase A. 1-#10. 11 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Remove from Circuit. 12 Select panel PP-2B. 1-#10. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Circuit Properties. 6 Click OK. Verify and adjust wire sizes 7 With panel LP-2B still selected. A warning indicates that the power system is empty and will be deleted. 14 Close the warning dialog. 212 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . and Phase C .3712 VA. Scroll down. Click OK. 13 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. The loads are now more evenly distributed over the three phases (Phase A .

24 Select the transformer TP-2B. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. click (Open). and click OK. under Electrical . 17 Close the warning dialog. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. Creating a Panel Schedule | 213 .15 Select panel PP-2B. for Rating. 3 In the Select Panels dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Clear Selection. and click OK. for Rating. Panel PP-2B is now reconnected to transformer TP-2B. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. The Panel Schedule Report appears in a new window. under Electrical . Create the panel schedule report 1 Verify that the Level 1 Power Plan is open. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. click Training Files. The circuit breaker size for panel PP-2B is now sized to handle the connected load. Click OK. Creating a Panel Schedule In this exercise. 23 With panel PP-2B still selected. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.rvt. 21 With panel PP-2B still selected. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit.Loads. 20 Click OK to close the warning dialog.Loads. 25 Press ESC to deselect the panel. you create a panel schedule report for panelboard MDP-1. Next you create a panel schedule. enter 25A. Select PP-2B. 18 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports and Schedules panel ➤ Panel Schedule. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_09_i. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. enter 30A.

Under Body Text. for Font. Next you use the System Browser to check your design. 12 Close the file with or without saving it.NOTE If a panel schedule has already been created for a panel. under Other. drag PP-2B onto the sheet. under Reports ➤ Panel Schedule. Under Header Text.Panel Schedules. enter 1/8. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_10_i. for Font Size. select Bold and Italic. 8 Click Modify Schedule Graphics tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. enter 3/32. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. 5 In the Project Browser. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog. and open E601 . The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. 4 Close the report. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. 11 Click OK twice. the panel will not appear in the Select Panels dialog. expand Sheets (all). 10 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Header Text.rvt. 214 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet. for Font Size. click Training Files. Under Header Text. for Appearance. select Berlin Sans FB. 7 Select the schedule. click Edit. 6 In the Project Browser. click (Open).

note that the receptacle is not connected to any circuit. 6 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall and press TAB once. press TAB once. select space Lounge 212. Check circuits 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Circuits. 9 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 7 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the right side wall and press TAB once. Expand Unassigned. Checking Your Design | 215 . 4 In the System Browser: ■ Right-click a column heading. each with a load of 180VA. Notice that the receptacle on the right side wall is not connected to circuit 2. notice that PP-2C for circuit 2 is updated. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add to Circuit. 11 Select the receptacle on the right side wall. There are 4 devices connected to circuit 2. 3 Move the System Browser to the bottom of the drawing area.View unassigned components 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. Note the receptacle in space Lounge 212. 12 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. Expand Power ➤ PP-2C ➤ circuit 2. 8 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall. In the System Browser. ■ ■ 5 In the drawing area. In the System Browser. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. and then click the receptacle to select the circuit. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel PP-2C. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser.

15 In the dialog. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. for Panel. 16 Close the details dialog. 20 On the Options Bar. 17 In the drawing area. 22 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 21 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. select MDP-1.14 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. 216 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 18 Select panel LP-2C. click (Expand warning dialog) to view details of the warning. expand the warning category for Circuit is not assigned to a panel ➤ Warning 2. zoom to space Electrical 214. under Warnings. Notice that panel LP-2C is not connected. 19 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Systems Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. Panel LP-2C is now connected to the main distribution panel MDP-1.

Creating a Plumbing System In this tutorial. 217 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a plumbing system.

218 .

right-click PVC .Design is open. Specifying default sanitary piping settings for the main and branch piping. click Training Files. in addition to loading existing families. Adding a pipe size. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . planning is critical to a successful design. Loading pipe fittings required by the plumbing system.Design ➤ Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 In the Name dialog. and click Properties. and click OK. You load the families of components that are required for your plumbing systems. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. you prepare to design the plumbing system by: ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a PVC Sanitary Pipe type. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing\RME_Plumb_Planning_01_i. you create a PVC pipe type. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. In this exercise.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. In this lesson.Planning a Plumbing System 9 Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project. click Duplicate.Plumbing Plan . and specify the default fittings that will be used with this type.Vent. type PVC . Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan. 219 .Sanitary. and verify that Level 1 . 2 In the Project Browser.

and open Imperial\Families\Trap P . under Mechanical. 23 In the Add Pipe Size dialog. select Tee Reducing Double Vent . 28 Close the file with or without saving it.Sch 40 .PVC . click Modify. enter 27/32''. Add a pipe size 20 In the left pane. click Training Files. select Plastic. select Sanitary. 9 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog.DWV: Standard. 12 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. select None. 21 In the right pane. 18 For System Type. 17 In the left pane. enter 10°. 26 Click OK. refer to Revit MEP Online Help. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. and click Main. select Branch. under Pipe Types. for Material. In the Project Browser. and click OK. Load piping component families 7 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. PVC . 19 Specify the same settings for the Branch sanitary piping as you used for the Main. Specify sanitary piping settings 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . 14 Expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. 220 | Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . for Nominal. DWV represents Domestic Waste Vent. 25 For Outside.rfa. select Pipe Settings ➤ Sizes. 22 Click New Size.DWV: Standard. select Tee.PVC . verify that Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing are selected. 13 In the right panel. enter 1/2''.5 In the Type Properties dialog. select Sanitary.Sch 40 . For Offset.Vent is listed. select Pipe Types: PVC Sanitary. click Pipe Settings. enter 5/8''. Tap. 6 Click OK. enter -4' . for: ■ ■ ■ ■ Preferred Junction Type. 16 Specify settings for the Main sanitary piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. Cross. NOTE For additional information on the Mechanical Settings. select Tee Vent .Sch 40 . Tee. The new pipe type is listed in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Pipe Fittings. for Pipe Connector Tolerance. 10 On the Selection panel.PVC .0''. 8 Click Place Pipe Fitting tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. 27 For the new pipe size. 24 For Inside Diameter. 15 For System Type.DWV.

Add a sanitary and vent stack to the system. you design the plumbing system for the Level 1 men’s room in a commercial building. add a hot water heater. sanitary piping.Designing a Plumbing System 10 In this lesson. Create piping to connect sinks to the sanitary system. Create the sanitary plumbing system. vent. and add piping to physically connect the fixtures to the system. and create piping to physically connect the sinks to the hot water system. including plumbing fixtures. and hot and cold water piping. Create the hot water system. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place sanitary plumbing fixtures. 221 . Create the cold water system.

Plumbing Plan .Design ➤ Floor Plans. 222 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and verify that Level 1 . In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. move the cursor over a space and refer to the tooltip or the Status Bar for information. 1 urinal.Design is open. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_01_i. including the men’s room (space Male 107). 2 Zoom in to the bottom middle area of the floor plan. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Place wall-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser.Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures In this exercise. as shown. you add 2 toilets. You place 3 sinks in a later exercise. click Training Files. NOTE To identify a space name and number. and a floor drain to the level 1 men’s room.

5 On the Placement panel. Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 223 .Flush Valve . Reference lines are included in the plan view to make it easier to place components. 4 On the Element panel. 6 Click to place a toilet in the accessible toilet space. centered on the bottom horizontal reference line.1. 1 wall-mounted urinal.Wall Mounted. in the Type Selector.6 gpf. and 3 sinks. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture.The men's room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls. as shown. under Water Closet . select Public . against the left wall.

and press Esc. use the reference line to center the fixture. zoom in closer. NOTE If it is difficult to align the urinal to the reference line. Place a wall-mounted urinal 9 In the Type Selector.7 Click to place another toilet.Wall Hung. select 3/4'' Flush Valve. (Again. above the first in the standard toilet space. 10 Click to place the urinal in the space above the 2 toilet spaces. 224 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . under Urinal .) 8 Press Esc.

12 On the Placement panel. 13 Click to place the drain above and to the right of the accessible toilet (at approximately 6'' and 6'' from the intersection of the reference lines for the 2 toilet areas). under Floor Drain . 14 Click Modify. select 5''x5'' Strainer . click Place on Face. In placing the fixture. Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 225 .Place a floor drain 11 In the Type Selector.Rectangular. you select the floor as the face because this is a floor mounted drain.2'' Drain.

The default systems contain the fixtures that you placed. 17 If all disciplines are displayed. and review the components listed under this system. and Default Domestic Cold Water. click Training Files. 20 Expand the Default Domestic Cold Water folder. and click View ➤ Piping. and notice that there are 2 default systems: Default Sanitary. a urinal. 16 Click the title bar for the browser. Creating a Sanitary System This is the first of 3 exercises that guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and notice that the drain is not included because it does not have a cold water connector.Open the System Browser 15 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.rvt. and a floor drain. In this exercise. You then use Revit MEP’s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_02_i. right-click in the System Browser table heading. 226 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 21 Close the file with or without saving it. 19 Expand Default Sanitary. and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. 18 Expand the Unassigned folder. The fixtures are included in the default system based on the connectors included with the components (sanitary connectors and cold water connectors). In the left pane of the Open dialog.

expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Plumbing Plan . verify that Plumbing Fixtures is selected. open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. Creating a Sanitary System | 227 . 8 In the Filter dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans.Create the sanitary plumbing system 1 In the Project Browser. 7 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 4 Zoom in to the plumbing fixtures in both views. and click OK. 6 In the plan view.Design is open. clear Lines (<Overhead>).Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. 5 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. draw a selection box around the fixtures in the men's room. starting in the lower left and moving to the upper right corner. 2 In the Project Browser. and verify that Level 1 . 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Only plumbing fixtures are selected.

10 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 13 In the Systems Browser. 228 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . the Create Cold Water System option would also be available. If you deselected the drain.9 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Sanitary. You include the bathroom space number in the name. and notice that Sanitary 107 is listed. so the Create Sanitary System is available. click Finish Editing System. The components that were listed under the default system are now included in the Sanitary 107 system. expand Sanitary. 11 On the Options Bar. All of the fixtures except for the drain also have cold water connectors. enter Sanitary 107. The fixtures you selected all have sanitary connectors. 12 On the Edit System panel. for System Name. and the empty default sanitary folder is deleted.

The base creates a vertical pipe for the system to connect into and establishes a source or an outlet for flow. 18 Click to select a point to the left of the accessible toilet. select one of the components in the system. A preview of the piping layout displays. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Place Base. The base is placed. 16 In the Select a System dialog. select Sanitary 107. Creating a Sanitary System | 229 .Create physical connections 14 In the plan view. and click OK. for example. a toilet. 15 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. as shown. at the midpoint of the detail lines.

25 On the Options Bar. for Slope. select 4''. enter -1' 0''. The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping of the sanitary piping in the system. enter -1' 0''. When laying out a number of different systems with different offset requirements. click Solutions. and modify it to meet project requirements. and click OK. The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical.19 On the Options Bar. for Solution Type. The default settings are automatically modified. enter -4'-0”. 27 Click Modify. for Offset. enter 1/8'' / 12''. 26 On the Options Bar. The positive value slopes the pipe down toward the base point. and for Offset. 230 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 22 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. select Intersections. 21 On Options Bar. click (Next Solution) until Solution Type 2 of 7 is selected. 24 In the left pane. and click Settings. it is helpful to be able to change the defaults as you work. select Branch. You override the default pipe settings before applying the recommended pipe layout. 23 For Offset. select Main. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. You accept this suggested solution. for Diameter.

Creating a Sanitary System | 231 . select the vertical route path segments.Customize the suggested layout 28 While pressing Ctrl. and move the cursor to the left to align all 4 segments to the base point. 29 Click the move parallel control (4-way arrow).

30 In the 3D view. as shown. and drag the line to the left to snap perpendicular to the main. 31 Click Modify. 232 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 32 Select the vertical branch line for one of the toilets. use the ViewCube to orient the view. as shown.

click Finish Layout.33 Using the previous method. Creating a Sanitary System | 233 . adjust the vertical branch line for the other toilet. 34 On the Generate Layout panel.

■ ■ ■ ■ 1=Branch in a network 2=Branch in a network including the branch objects 3=Branch in a network up to a piece of equipment 4=Network (including fixtures) 36 Click to select the fitting to the drain.Examine the piping Complete all steps in this section in the 3D Plumbing view. and press Tab 4 times to check connectivity. When a fitting is reversed. select the fitting and click to reorient it. 234 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and examine the sanitary tee to verify proper orientation. 35 Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures.

38 Close the file with or without saving it. The slope control for every segment should indicate the slope is toward the sanitary outlet. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 235 . and manually creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system.37 Select the pipe segment to the right of the fitting. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise. adding sinks in the men’s room. and check the slope control. as shown. you continue with the work from the last exercise.

Plumbing Plan . and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_03_i. 2 Zoom in to the men’s room (Space Male 107). select 22''x22'' . 4 On the Element panel.Rectangular. In the left pane of the Open dialog. as shown.rvt. under Lavatory . 6 Click to place the sink centered on the top horizontal reference line. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . Add sinks to the layout 1 In the Project Browser.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 236 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .Public. 5 On the Placement panel.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and verify that Level 1 . in the Type Selector. click Training Files.Design is open.

Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 237 . ■ Move the cursor up above the top reference line. without having to enter ' and '' symbols. For example. On the Options Bar. 9 Make 2 copies of the sink: ■ ■ ■ Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. you can enter a space to separate the value for feet and inches. 8 Select the sink. TIP When entering dimensions. select Multiple.7 Click Modify. and press Enter to create a second sink. Click the right endpoint of the placement reference line for the sink to establish a start point. enter 2' 4''. in this step you can enter 2 4 (two space four) to specify 2' 4''.

11 In the System Browser. Press Esc. click Add To System. 13 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 14 On the Edit Piping System panel. Add sinks to the sanitary system 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.■ ■ Enter 2' 4''. and press Enter to create the third sink. 238 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . click Finish Editing System. expand Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 107. 12 In the drawing area. 15 Click the 3 sinks. select a component of the Sanitary 107 system. 16 On the Edit System panel. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen.

under Design ➤ Plumbing .Design ➤ 3D Views. with the tee fitting selected. and zoom in to the elbow fitting for the urinal. use the ViewCube to orient the view. double-click 3D Plumbing. 21 Select the tee. 22 In the plan view. 20 Select the fitting. and click the + control on the left to upgrade the fitting to a tee. 18 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) have been added to the Sanitary 107 system. and click Draw Pipe.In the System Browser. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 239 . right-click the top connector (sanitary connector). Create piping to connect the sinks 17 In the Project Browser. as shown. 19 In the 3D view.

23 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch off this option. 25 Move the cursor up to the centerline of the middle sink. and click Apply. press Spacebar. the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. In this example. 240 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 27 Click Modify. piping connected to the sanitary system displays in olive green.6''. enter 2' . 24 On the Options Bar. When you press the Spacebar. and click to draw the pipe. enter 1/8'' / 12''. for Offset. NOTE Piping is displayed according to color filters specified in the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. 26 On the Options Bar. for Slope.

and click the lower rotate control to align the fitting parallel to the sinks. 32 Select the double wye fitting.Sch 40 . click to place the fitting. 30 In the 3D view. under Wye 45 Deg Double . select Standard. 31 Click Modify. 29 In the Type Selector.3D view shown for clarity 28 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.PVC .DWV. move the cursor over the stub pipe. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 241 . and when the vertical center line displays.

right-click the right connector. zoom in to the double wye fitting. and press Enter. and click Draw Pipe. In the next steps. 38 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch on this option. 36 In the section view. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 35 In the plan view. enter 1'.33 With the fitting selected. you add pipe segments to the double wye. 37 Select the fitting. 242 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 34 Press Esc. enter 6''. on the Options Bar. 39 Draw the pipe as shown: ■ Draw at a 45 degree angle up and to the right. double-click the section head to open the section view. and press Enter. for Offset.

Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered. as shown. 41 Using the same method. 42 Click Modify. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 243 . and click to place the pipe. 40 Click Modify. 43 Select the center vertical pipe in the double wye fitting. draw similar piping for the left sink (the first segment angled at 135°). ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the right until the end of the pipe segment intersects with the centerline of the right sink.

right-click the bottom connector. and press Enter to create the segment of pipe. 48 Click Modify. 49 Using the same method. Add P-Trap Fittings 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile so you can see all 3 views. enter 6''. 46 In the section view. draw a selection box around the left sink to select it. and press Esc. 244 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 47 Move the cursor down. and click Draw Pipe.44 Drag the upper control until the pipe aligns with the centerline of the horizontal piping. draw a 6'' pipe for the other 2 sinks. press Spacebar.

under Trap P . 51 In the Type Selector.DWV. 55 In the 3D view. click to place the P-Trap at the endpoint of the stub pipe for the top sink. place a P-Trap on the other 2 sinks. 52 In the plan view. select Standard.50 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.PVC . 54 Click Modify. select the P-Trap on the left. You can see in the 3D view that it is connected.Sch 40 . Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 245 . 53 Using the same method. rotate the P-Trap for the other 2 sinks. You adjust the orientation after placing all 3 P-Traps. 56 Using the same method. and click the rotate control 3 times to orient the pipe toward the double wye piping.

Move the cursor to the left. click to select the P-Trap for the middle sink. connect the right sink to the double wye. Click Modify Pipe Fittings tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. and click Draw Pipe. select the left P-Trap. 58 Using the same method. and press Enter. Select the double wye pipe on the left. 59 Connect the middle sink using a routing solution: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. Click in the plan view. right-click the left connector on the P-Trap. In the plan view. enter 6''. The piping is connected and the appropriate fittings are automatically created. 246 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .57 Finish the connection for the left sink: ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view.. Click Modify.

■ In the 3D view. while pressing Ctrl. In the Type Selector. under Pipe Types. On the Routing Solutions panel. click Finish to select the recommended solution. Press Esc. while pressing Ctrl. and select a proposed solution. as shown. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 247 . ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify a slope 60 In the 3D view. select the section of pipe you just drew. Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Routing Solutions. select PVC Sanitary. Routing Solutions tools are activated that let you add control points or remove control points. select the 3 horizontal pipes from the sinks. and select the vertical section of pipe from the wye.

and verify the slope. 248 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 63 On the Slope Editor panel. click Finish. click Training Files. 65 Close the file with or without saving it. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_04_i.61 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Slope. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. for Slope. you continue with the work on the sanitary system. adjusting the sanitary stack. 64 Select a pipe that you just modified. verify that 1/8'' / 12'' is selected. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You have appropriately sloped the pipe. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise.rvt. 62 On the Options Bar.

Sch 40 .Add a vertical soil stack 1 In the Project Browser.DWV.PVC . 2 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. select the vertical stack. 4 Click the top + control to upgrade the fitting to a tee.Plumbing Plan . click Modify. 7 On the Selection panel.Design.Floor level line. select Standard. 10 In the 3D view. select the elbow fitting on the right. and open the following views: ■ ■ ■ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .Design. 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing.Overall. Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 38. and click Draw Pipe. right-click the top connector. as shown. and click to draw the pipe. 5 Select the tee. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 249 . Add a reducing wye to the stack 8 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 3 In the Section view. and adjust the views as necessary to view the plumbing. 9 In the Type Selector. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 6 Move the cursor up to the 02 . under Wye Combination with 8th Bend . and click the intersection to place the fitting.

13 Click the rotate control once. Add a pipe plug to cap the cleanout 16 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 14 On the Options Bar. as shown. 12 Select the fitting. select Standard. 18 In the plan view.11 Click Modify.Sch 40 .DWV. under Plug .PVC . 17 In the Type Selector. click the midpoint at the end of the sanitary pipe. 250 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and click the rotate control to change the orientation. enter 1'-0”. for Offset. 15 Press Esc.

click Training Files.19 Click Modify.Design ➤ Floor Plans. The plug is added to the end to cap off the cleanout.Plumbing Plan . Creating the Cold Water System | 251 . Creating the Cold Water System In this exercise. Specify mechanical settings for the hot and cold water systems 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_05_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and verify that Level 1 . A cleanout is required on all vertical stacks. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .rvt. you create the domestic cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system.Design is open.

and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Cold Water system. select Main. 7 In the left pane. select Pipe Types: Water. 14 In the System Browser. select Domestic Hot Water. (Do not select the floor drain because it does not have a hot or cold water connector. 6 In the left pane. draw a selection box to select the toilets.Design ➤ 3D Views. select Domestic Hot Water. select Plumbing Fixtures. select Pipe Types: Water. expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. 17 In the Filter dialog. select Branch. minimize the Sanitary system. for System Type. for System Type. 15 In the plan view. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and click OK. These categories include all of the components placed earlier that have relevant connectors. 4 In the right pane. you specify different offset elevations for the cold water piping and the hot water piping. if necessary. 8 Specify options for the Main cold water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. and notice that Default Domestic Hot Water and Default Domestic Cold Water systems are listed. verify that the value is 9' 0''.) 10 Click OK. 252 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . double-click 3D Plumbing .2 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . Create the cold water system 11 In the Project Browser. 9 In the left pane. 5 Specify options for the Main hot water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. select Domestic Cold Water. enter 9' 3''. For Offset. expand Unassigned. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and sinks. (Remember to specify Domestic Cold Water as the System Type. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Hot Water system. 3 In the left pane of the Mechanical settings dialog. and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. click Check None. and click Main. urinal. under Design ➤ Plumbing . and for System Type. To minimize opportunities for piping interference. select Branch. For Offset.Overall.) 16 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.

In the System Browser. Create piping for the cold water system 22 In the 3D view. Creating the Cold Water System | 253 . 23 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. click Edit System.18 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Cold Water. indicating that it is now part of the cold water system. select the toilet closest to the vertical soil stack. For Flow Conversion Method. 21 On the Edit System panel. 19 On the System Tools panel. click Finish Editing System. notice that the Default Domestic Cold water system is removed because all of the fixtures have been added to the DCW 107 system. verify that Predominantly Flush Valves is selected. Notice that the water main displays in blue. 20 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For System Name. enter DCW 107. Expand Domestic Cold Water ➤ DCW 107 to verify the components. 24 Click the horizontal water main above the toilets.

enter 10'. 33 Click Modify. for Offset. For Slope. 35 In the Type Selector. select 3/4''. as shown. select Water. and click the connector. select the sink above the urinal. 30 In the plan view. 37 On the Options Bar. as shown. 38 Move the cursor up to the top of the third sink. 29 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Diameter. 31 On the Options Bar.25 Using the same method. and press Enter. for Offset. 32 Move the cursor to the right.2 7/8''. 34 In the plan view. 36 Move the cursor to the left. under Pipe Types. For Offset. connect the second toilet. and press Enter. 26 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe. and click Draw Pipe. click to the left of the urinal. verify that Automatically Connect is selected. 254 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . enter 7''. and click to place the pipe. press Spacebar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe. enter 4'0”. enter 0”/12”. at the intersection of the water main pipe. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. right-click the top DCW connector. enter 3' . 27 On the Placement Tools panel. 28 In the Type Selector.

Creating the Cold Water System | 255 . 43 Click the branch cold water pipe. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.39 Move the cursor to the left. (Status Bar indicates Horizontal and [Pipes : Pipe Types : Water]). 42 In the Select Connector dialog. and click to connect to the main cold water line. select Connector 1 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 1'' : In. 40 Click Modify. 41 Select the top sink. The sink is connected to the cold water branch piping. and click OK.

add a water heater. 256 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . you create the hot water system. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. and add piping to connect the sinks in the menu’s room to the system. Creating the Hot Water System In this exercise.44 Using the same method. connect the middle sink to the branch pipe.

and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. while pressing Ctrl. and verify that Level 1 . click Training Files.Design is open.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Creating the Hot Water System | 257 . 2 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_06_i. 4 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 6 In the plan view. Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser. 5 In the System Browser.Overall. Notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) are listed. expand the Unassigned folder.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . In the left pane of the Open dialog.Plumbing Plan . 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and expand the Default Domestic Hot Water system. select the 3 sinks.rvt.Design ➤ Floor Plans.

a best practice to maximize operation is to assign all components to the appropriate system and clear the default folders. and click Edit System. Default Domestic Cold Water.7 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Hot Water. enter Domestic Hot Water 107. When designing systems. in the Unassigned folder. 12 In the Type Selector. Default Other folders are created and the Water Heater is listed.) Add the water heater to DCW 107 16 Select a sink in the men’s room. the Domestic Hot Water 107 system is listed along with the 3 sinks (lavatories). as shown. Default Domestic Hot Water.6 Gallon. 8 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ System Properties. select 0. verify that DCW 107 is selected. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog. 10 In the System Browser. Add a water heater 11 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 258 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 13 In the plan view. under Water Heater . (The folders are created according to the connectors available on the hot water heater. In later steps.Tankless. You add the water heater to the Domestic Cold Water system first. 14 Click Modify. click to position the water heater in the lower left corner of the utility room above the bathroom. for System Name. 17 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. and click OK. you edit the system to add equipment. 15 In the System Browser.

for Offset. specify: ■ ■ ■ Diameter: 1''. 23 On the Options Bar. right-click the middle left connector. verify that Automatically Connect is selected. 19 Select the water heater. select the water heater. enter 1' 6''. 24 Move the cursor up. enter 10’. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. Connect the water heater to the cold water supply 20 In the plan view. and select Draw Pipe. Offset: 4' 6''. and on the Edit System panel. Creating the Hot Water System | 259 . and press Enter. 22 In the Type Selector. The tankless water heater is connected to the cold water supply. 27 Click Modify. click Finish Editing System. Slope: 0''/12''. as shown.18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. and click the water main line. 26 Move the cursor to the right. 21 On the Placement Tools panel. 25 On the Options Bar.

right-click the bottom connector (domestic hot water). 33 On the Edit System panel. enter 1''. for Offset. for Diameter. 32 Click the tankless hot water heater. 38 Move the cursor to the right. 37 On the Options Bar. select a sink. and press Enter. 29 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. select Domestic Hot Water 107. and click just to the left of the cold water pipe. Connect the water heater to the hot water supply 34 Select the water heater. 30 On the System Tools panel. click Finish Editing System. and on the Placement Tools panel. 31 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. as shown. 36 Move the cursor down.Add the water heater to Domestic Hot Water 107 28 In the plan view. and in the System Selector. enter 9' 0''. 35 On the Options Bar. and click Draw Pipe. click Edit System. enter 1' 6''. 260 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . select 4'-6''. and for Offset. click Automatically Connect to switch it off.

for Offset. Creating the Hot Water System | 261 . 41 Move the cursor down. and press Enter. 42 Click Modify. and click just above the bottom sink. enter 2' 8''. as shown. enter 1’.39 Move the cursor down. 40 On the Options Bar.

44 Select the horizontal pipe that you just drew.43 In the 3D view. connect the other 2 sinks to the hot water pipe. select the left sink (the one closest to the urinal). 262 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 45 Using the same method and the Connect Into tool. The hot water pipe is automatically connected to the sink.

46 Close the file with or without saving it. 47 Optional: Open the RME_Plumb_Design_07_i. Creating the Hot Water System | 263 .rvt project and view the vent piping for the plumbing system.

264 .

Creating a Fire Protection System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a fire protection system. 265 .

266 .

you will create a wet fire protection system for the second floor of an office building. click Training Files. After finishing each exercise. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. you can choose to save your work. In this tutorial. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. You create a new pipe type. and click Duplicate. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_01_i.Planning a Fire Protection System 11 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. 267 .com/revitmep-documentation and download them. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. go to http://www. If the tutorial training files are not present. you begin work on the project that contains a wet fire protection system. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type. However. Specifying Pipe Settings In this exercise.autodesk. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. In this lesson. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Right-click Standard. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory.

You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. duct. select Fire Protection Wet. For System Type. Determining Zone Requirements In this exercise. For Pipe Type.3 Right-click the copy (Standard 2). In this exercise. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. for Material. select Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion ➤ Branch. and then click OK. structural beams. so the pipe main will be offset from level 2. and click Properties. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. and enter Fire Protection Wet. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. under Mechanical. You also configured the conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems. select Main. or architectural components. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. select Carbon Steel. In the left pane. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. you modify the type properties of the pipe. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is listed. you created a new pipe type for the wet fire protection system and modified its type properties. However. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. Configure pipe conversion settings 7 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. 4 Right-click Fire Protection Wet. you create a sprinkler zone project parameter. 268 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . 9 Click OK. 6 In the Project Browser. select Fire Protection Wet. click Rename. For System Type. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. 10 Close the file with or without saving it. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. In the next exercise. For Pipe Type. For Offset. 8 In the Mechanical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. You then assign spaces in the top portion of the plan to one zone and spaces in the bottom portion to another zone. For Offset. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. Next. verify that 9' 0" is selected. you create project parameters and work with schedules. verify that 9' 0" is specified.

8 Using a crossing window.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . select space Instruction 221 as shown.Fire Protection Plan . 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. the space crossing lines display. enter Zone 1.rvt. Under Categories. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. indicating that it’s the active view. right-click. under Fire Protection. Determining Zone Requirements | 269 . For Group parameter under. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . click Add. and then click OK. for Sprinkler Zone. You draw a crossing window from the lower left to the upper right of the area you want to enclose. select Spaces. 5 Click OK twice.Design is highlighted. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. 6 In the drawing area.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. When you highlight a space using the cursor. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_02_i. and click Element Properties. select Fire Protection. for Name. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. select the upper half of the building. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog. enter Sprinkler Zone.

select Zone 1. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_03_i. and then click OK. for Sprinkler Zone. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and then access instance properties. for Sprinkler Zone. to which you add various parameters. You modify the schedules and add an embedded schedule in order to use the schedule as a design tool. 12 In the Instance Properties dialog. verify that only Spaces are selected. 13 Using the same method. 270 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System .rvt. under Fire Protection. 15 Press Esc to clear the selection. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule In this exercise. 10 In the Filter dialog. filter the bottom half of the building to select only Spaces. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. click Training Files. and click OK. you create schedules for sprinkler design. including a calculated value parameter. under Fire Protection. and then click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter Zone 2.

15 In the new row: ■ ■ In the Protection Area Type column. select Length. enter Protection Area Construction Type. select Feet and fractional inches. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a schedule parameter 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. enter Maximum Spacing. select Spaces. Obstructed-Combustible. 13 To resize the column widths in the schedule. The schedule displays. In the Maximum Spacing column. For Type of Parameter. 11 Click OK twice. 14 Select the new header. double-click on each column separator.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 271 . Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. For Name.Fire Protection Plan . do the following: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. and click Field Format. 7 Click OK. for Name. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter data. create a parameter named Maximum Coverage Area that is an Area type and is grouped under Fire Protection. and on the ribbon. select Fire Protection.Design is highlighted. enter Light. Click OK. 10 In the Format dialog. For Rounding. For Key name. For Group parameter under. indicating that it’s the active view. enter Sprinkler Spacing and Coverage Area Schedule. Add schedule data 12 Select the header in the Key Name column and enter Protection Area Type as the new header. select To the nearest 1'. click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Rows: New. Select Schedule keys. For Units. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 9 On the Formatting tab. select Maximum Spacing. 6 Using the same method. click the Formatting tab. Click OK.Create a key schedule 1 In the Project Browser. enter 15. click Add Parameter.

For Name.■ In the Maximum Coverage Area column. select Spaces. 18 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Category. enter 130. Obstructed-Noncombustible Ordinary. NOTE The units of measure display automatically. Click OK. based on the parameter settings you specified previously. 16 Using the same method. double-click in the order listed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Sprinkler Zone Level Area Protection Area Construction Type 272 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . Specify fields and create a calculated value parameter ■ In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ On the Fields tab. Obstructed-Noncombustible Light. Obstructed-Noncombustible Extra. Obstructed-Combustible Ordinary. and press Enter. add more schedule data: Protection Area Type Light. Unobstructed Extra. Obstructed-Combustible Extra. Unobstructed Ordinary. under Available fields. enter Sprinkler Schedule. Unobstructed Maximum Spacing 15' Maximum Coverage Area 200 SF 15' 12' 12' 12' 15' 15' 200 SF 90 SF 90 SF 90 SF 130 SF 130 SF 15' 130 SF Create a sprinkler schedule 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities.

22 Click OK twice. and click View Properties. click . select Number. For Units. select 0 decimal place. select Minimum Sprinklers. under Other. The Sprinkler Schedule displays. In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. and then use the method learned previously to select Maximum Coverage Area from the Fields dialog. Select Header and Blank line. Click OK. For Type. 19 Click the Formatting tab. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Sprinkler Zone. for Sort by. select Fixed. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 273 . select Area. For Then by. select Level. For Discipline. In the Fields dialog. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design requirements. 25 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. The resulting formula is Area/Maximum Coverage Area. 21 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings.■ ■ ■ ■ Maximum Coverage Area Maximum Spacing Click Calculated Value. For Rounding. Enter the formula operator / after Area. click Edit. For Formula. enter Minimum Sprinklers. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). and click Field Format. Organize schedule data 23 Right-click in the schedule. 20 On the Formatting tab. select Common. for Sorting/Grouping. and click OK.

30 Click OK twice. select Level equals Level 2. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog. For Fields. For Fields. select Minimum Sprinklers. and then select Hidden field. and select Totals only. The schedule is arranged and sorted as specified. click Edit. On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Fields.■ ■ ■ ■ Select Header and Blank line. select Level. 274 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . 27 In the drawing area. select Hidden field. select Number. For Then by (second instance). Under Field formatting. select Grand totals. select Sprinkler Zone. 26 Click OK 3 times. for Filter. and click View Properties. right-click the schedule. 28 In the Instance Properties dialog. verify that Use default settings is selected. for Filter by. and then click Field Format. At the bottom of the dialog. ■ In the Format dialog.

34 In the Maximum Coverage Area column and in the Maximum Spacing column. On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. System Name. select Grand totals. 36 In the Instance Properties dialog. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. 32 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Headers: Group. On the Formatting tab. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 275 . ■ ■ ■ 38 Click OK 3 times. use click and drag to select the last 4 schedule column headers. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. select Embedded Schedule. and enter Maximum Sprinkler Spacing and Area Coverage. under Other. For Category. and click View Properties. Under Field formatting. for Available fields. and select Totals only. select Sprinklers. delete the word Maximum. select Count. select Calculate totals. for Fields.The schedule is filtered to show only zones on level 2. 33 Click in the grouped header cell. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Embedded Schedule tab. and Count. double-click Type. Create an embedded schedule 35 Right-click the schedule. click Edit. Group schedule columns 31 In the drawing area. for Embedded Schedule.

use a selection box to select the upper half of the building. IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. 51 In the Instance Properties dialog. select space 221 Instruction. 276 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . 43 Click Cancel. but their values are not determined. under Identity Data. under Identity Data. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. 52 Click OK. for Protection Area Construction Type. select space 221 Instruction. select Light. and access the instance properties. 47 In the Instance Properties dialog. 46 With the space still selected. Unobstructed. double-click FP . This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). Notice that the selection you made in the schedule displays in the dialog. 50 Access the instance properties. and click OK. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 40 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile to tile the floor plan and the Sprinkler Schedule. 45 For Protection Area Construction Type. for Protection Area Construction Type. Unobstructed. 44 In the schedule. select Ordinary.Fire Protection Plan Design. The parameter change is evident in the schedule. 49 Filter the selection for spaces only. select Ordinary. notice that there is nothing specified for Protection Area Construction Type. 48 In the floor plan. 42 In the Instance Properties dialog. Notice also that the Maximum Spacing and Maximum Coverage Area parameters that you created are listed under Fire Protection. you are actually editing information in a database of building information. and the spacing parameter values are evident. Unobstructed. When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. As a result. 41 In the plan view. click in the floor plan to make it the active view.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Modify space properties from the schedule 39 In the Project Browser. under Identity Data.

53 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 277 .

278 .

you will understand the process. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. After finishing each exercise. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . methodology.Designing a Fire Protection System 12 In this tutorial.rvt. Place host-based sprinklers 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you create a wet fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project. go to http://www. You will use the sprinkler schedule that you created in a previous exercise as a design guide for sprinkler placement. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010.FP_Ceiling to make it the active view. However. 279 .Design ➤ Ceiling Plans. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP. click Training Files.autodesk. As you create the system. In the left pane of the Open dialog. By following the recommended workflow. If the tutorial training files are not present. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. you place host-based sprinklers in a ceiling plan view. you can choose to save your work. As you place the sprinklers. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. and double-click Level 2 . each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_01_i. hosted to the linked architectural ceiling family. you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan. Adding Sprinklers In this exercise. At the end of this tutorial.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially.

This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient. 3 In the Project Browser. 5 Click in the ceiling plan to make it the active view. When there is a small misalignment. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and arrange the views so that they are tiled horizontally. Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings. After placing the initial sprinkler. IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion of a layout path to physical piping in later exercises. the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers. there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Sprinkler Schedule. 280 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .2 Zoom in to the spaces in the lower right corner of the building. When this happens. 6 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler.

Semi-Recessed Hosted : 1/2" Pendent from the Type Selector drop-down. select the sprinklers that you placed. Adding Sprinklers | 281 . place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tiles. and select Sprinkler . and click to place 3 sprinklers. Notice that the sprinkler schedule updates to show the sprinklers you added in space 202. 10 Press Esc twice.7 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. 9 In space Instruction 202. You can use the Minimum Sprinklers column in the schedule as guidance when you design the fire protection system. while pressing Ctrl. because it calculates the number of sprinklers needed for each space and the maximum distance between sprinklers.Pendent . because the schedule indicates that each of those spaces requires a minimum of 3 sprinklers. 11 In the drawing area. as shown. Continue placing sprinklers You copy the existing sprinklers to place other sprinklers in spaces 203 and 204. 8 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face.

13 On the Options Bar. 282 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . you place non-hosted sprinklers. Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. Also. and then press Esc. Next. 15 Select points in the 2 spaces to the left.12 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 14 Select the upper left corner near the copy selection as the copy start point. Copies of the sprinklers are placed after you specify the end point. as shown. the cursor changes to indicate that the Copy tool is active. verify that Constrain is cleared. and that Copy and Multiple are selected.

specify a vertical offset.FP_Ceiling view. Adding Sprinklers | 283 . and then click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down. 20 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. 17 In the Project Browser. 16 Close the ceiling plan view. you place non-hosted sprinklers. enter 10' 6". under Constraints. 22 In the 200A Corridor space. zoom in to the entire wing in the lower right of the building. enter 11. it’s added to the space at an offset of 0' 0". and then tile the floor plan and schedule views horizontally. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate. you adjust the offset.Fire Protection Plan . 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. and press Enter.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and 200C). 200B. it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected. indicating that the design requirements for the corridor spaces have been met. This number is determined in the schedule. click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array. 25 Click OK. by adding the minimum number of sprinklers for the 3 corridor spaces combined.Design. enter 14' 6". 21 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. Next. and select Sprinkler-Upright : 1/2" Upright from the Type Selector drop-down. move the cursor to the right. and click Element Properties. 19 In the floor plan. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the Level 2 .Place non-hosted sprinklers In this section. 29 Press Esc. for Offset. click to place a sprinkler at the beginning of the corridor as shown. Array sprinklers 26 With the sprinkler still selected. 18 Type WT. open Design ➤ FP . and array the sprinklers in the 3 spaces that comprise the Corridor (200A. For Number. Because the sprinkler is not hosted. 23 Right-click the sprinkler. 28 Click the center of the existing sprinkler as the start point. Notice that the schedule updates. You place the system components based on the design requirements (sprinkler count and spacing) indicated in the schedule.

1 In the Project Browser. you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_02_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. However.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Creating a Piping System In this exercise. A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing. After creating the logical connection. piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing.Fire Protection Plan . You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers.30 Close the file with or without saving it. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. Unlike logical connections (systems).Design is highlighted. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP. In this exercise.rvt. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. and then creating the logical connection between these system components. click Training Files. and with piping (physical connection). In the next exercise. indicating that it’s the active view. you connect the sprinklers by creating a system (logical connection). Then you simplify the layout using Modify tools from the Generate Layout tab on the ribbon to modify pipe branches prior to converting the layout to piping. 284 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed.

8 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Fire Protection Wet to create a fire protection wet system. click View ➤ Systems. 6 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet 1 system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow.2 Zoom in to the wing at the lower right of the building. 4 Drag the System Browser so that it docks at the bottom of the drawing area. As you assign sprinklers to systems. and assign the selected sprinklers to it. they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. Connect sprinklers with a system 7 Draw a selection box (from left to right) around the sprinklers in the office spaces. all of the selected sprinklers have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder. named Fire Protection Wet. within the Piping Systems folder. Explore the System Browser 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. In the System Browser. as shown. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. Creating a Piping System | 285 . and select Piping. 5 Right-click the header. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser.

providing system editing tools. ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. For Offset.Wet is selected.Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. 15 In the drawing area. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. For Pipe Type. In the left pane. 13 In the System Browser. 12 On the Options Bar. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red. Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. The Edit Piping System panel displays. and a piping layout preview displays. 18 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. and click Select. verify that 9' 0" is specified. system equipment. and on the Options Bar. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet 1 system logically connects the sprinklers. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. and number of elements in the system. The Generate Layout tools are activated. 19 Click OK. 286 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. double-click the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing to view the list of sprinklers. 11 With the system still selected. click Settings. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. select Branch. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. verify that Main is selected. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. for System Name. 16 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. NOTE The Generate Layout feature is available whenever a system component is selected. select an initial piping layout. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Solutions. 10 Right-click Fire Protection Wet 1. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. and select the system. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above level 2. Next. enter FP Wet_Zone2. 14 Click Finish Editing System. select a sprinkler that belongs to FP Wet_Zone2. press Tab. expand Fire Protection Wet ➤ FP Wet_Zone2 to see the included sprinklers. place the cursor over a sprinkler. click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection . indicating the logical connection.

and green represents branch lines). (elbow control) Creating a Piping System | 287 . 25 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Solution Type. 24 On the Generate Layout panel. The layout path solution displays (blue represents the main piping run. 21 Click in the upper right corner of the stairwell to place the base component. enter -12' 0". 23 For Offset. select 2".20 On the Generate Layout panel. as shown. 22 On the Options Bar. and select solution 5. click Place Base. The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. click Solutions. In general. the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction. When the layout is finished. verify that Network is selected. Use the arrow keys to view all the solutions. these settings will convert the base component to a 2" riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (9' 0"). Modify the layout 26 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. for Diameter. The base component provides a source for the fire protection system.

First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location. and then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview. 29 Click Finish Layout. All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically generated. as shown. A (parallel movement control) displays. click Modify. 288 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the 3 offices on level 2.■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction. The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. 27 Select the horizontal layout path segment connecting to the base point. On the Generate Layout panel. 28 Drag the parallel movement control up to a point between the office/corridor walls and the corridor sprinklers.

You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them. and then you create piping to physically connect them. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. Next. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system. View the system in 3D 30 Open FP . 31 Zoom in to the area with the sprinkler system. Either relocate the system components. and various manual pipe creation tools. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. or that offset elevations are incorrect. the Connect Into tool. or manually modify the pipe. select a different layout solution. 32 If necessary. you complete the wet system by adding the remaining sprinklers to the FP Wet_Zone2 system using the Layout Path tool. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines.IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 289 .

4 Click the left plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a tee.rvt. 1 In the Project Browser.Fire Protection Plan . 2 Zoom in.Design is highlighted. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_03_i. click Training Files. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. indicating that it’s the active view. and select the elbow fitting as shown. 3 If necessary. 290 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .

13 Click Finish Layout. 11 On the Generate Layout panel. air terminals. IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 291 . select a sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. 9 On the Edit System panel. 6 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System so that you can add sprinklers to the system. radiators. or a system component to display system tools. and pipe or duct is created. 16 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 12 On the Options Bar. 18 Click Finish Editing System. and click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. The selected sprinklers are assigned to FP Wet_Zone2. Add remaining sprinklers to FP Wet_Zone2 system 15 In the drawing area. 7 On the Edit Piping System panel.The tee provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the corridor. 14 Close the System Browser. draw a selection box from lower left to upper right around the sprinklers as shown (don’t include the last 3 sprinklers). and so on) are logically connected by a system. for Solution Type. Notice that the number of system elements updates on the Options Bar. verify that Network is selected. The layout automatically creates a path connecting to the tee created earlier. mechanical equipment. 8 In the corridor. click Finish Editing System. Connect the sprinklers with pipe 19 Zoom to the 3 spaces at the right end of the corridor. System tools display on the Piping Systems tab. 5 In the drawing area. 10 Select a sprinkler in the corridor. and select solution 5. click Add To System. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). select any sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. verify that Solutions is selected. you can select the pipe or duct. 17 Use a selection box to select the remaining 3 sprinklers.

zoom in to the corridor above the spaces that have piping. 25 Select the sprinkler. draw pipe from the last unconnected sprinkler to the main pipe. and select the horizontal segment of main piping as shown. and then press Esc. 23 View the result in the 3D view. 21 In the Piping Plan. pan and zoom to the next unconnected sprinkler. 22 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. right-click. click the intersection with the horizontal main pipe as the pipe endpoint. for Offset. and then tile the views. Notice that horizontal and vertical segments of pipe were added.20 Open Design ➤ FP . and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . select 9'. 29 Using the same method. 292 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 24 In the Piping Plan. and select the leftmost unconnected sprinkler. and click Draw Pipe. 27 On the Options Bar.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 26 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. 28 In the drawing area.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection.

it’s a visual indication that all components are connected correctly. 32 Use the cursor to highlight a section of the pipe.Layout in 2D Layout in 3D Verify connectivity 30 Close the 3D view. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. 31 In the plan view. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 293 . zoom so that you can see the entire wing with the fire protection system. and press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. Because the whole system highlights.

Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 294 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 4 On the Options Bar. 2 Zoom to the offices in the lower right corner. ■ 6 Press Esc. indicating that it’s the active view. click Training Files.Adding Vertical Supply Piping In this exercise. You also place a hose reel cabinet in the building and connect it to the supply standpipe. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design is highlighted.Fire Protection Plan .rvt. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. select 1/4" = 1'-0". you create a section view that you will use to work with vertical piping. double-click on the section head to open the section view. 5 Draw the section: ■ In the drawing area. Specify section properties 7 In the drawing area. for Scale. Click at the staircase to specify the section line endpoint. click outside the corridor wall at the stairs to specify the section line start point. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_04_i.

8 Right-click, and click View Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Graphics, for Sub-Discipline, select FP - Design. For View Classification, select Design. Under Identity Data, for View Name, enter FP Section_Stair. For Default View Template, select MEP Section. Click OK.

10 In the Project Browser, right-click Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ Sections ➤ FP Section_Stair, and click Apply Default View Template. 11 Zoom to the top near the horizontal pipe. 12 If necessary, drag the top section boundary line up. 13 Select the elbow fitting, and then click the top + grip to upgrade the elbow fitting to a tee. 14 Select the tee fitting, and then right-click the top connector, and click Draw Pipe. 15 Press Spacebar. 16 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel, and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection - Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 17 Move the cursor up, enter 7', and press Enter.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 295

18 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 19 Make Level 2 - Fire Protection Plan - Design the active view. Add mechanical equipment 20 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 21 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel, and select M_Hose Reel Cabinet Surface Mounted : 1"25mm from the drop-down list. 22 In the drawing area, click on the wall (host face) near the stairs to place the cabinet as shown, and then click Modify.

23 In the section view, zoom to the hose reel cabinet. 24 Select the cabinet, right-click the connector on the left of the cabinet, and click Draw Pipe.

296 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

25 Verify that Fire Protection - Wet is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. 26 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 2"50mm. 27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is active. 28 Connect to the vertical pipe (using the Intersection and Horizontal snaps), and then click Modify.

29 Close the section view. Add a valve 30 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 31 In the alert dialog, click Yes to load a family. 32 In the Open dialog, navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Gate Valve - 2-12 Inch.rfa, and click Open. 33 In the Type Selector, verify that Gate Valve - 2" is selected. 34 Select the midpoint of the horizontal pipe that extends from the cabinet, as shown, and then click Modify.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 297

A 2" gate valve is placed in the 2" diameter pipe.

35 Open 3D Fire Protection, and zoom in to the cabinet to see the valve in 3D.

36 Close the file with or without saving it.

298 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modifying Pipe Diameters
In this exercise, you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers, you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_05_i.rvt.

Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ 3D Views, and double-click 3D Fire Protection to make it the active view. 2 Enter WT to tile the 3D and floor plan views, and arrange them so that they’re tiled horizontally. 3 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. You will work primarily in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view.

NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter, height, or width. Changing the diameter, width, or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter, width, or height. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers, and because the design specifications require a 1 inch diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers, it’s more efficient to specify 1 inch diameter for all pipe runs, and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. 4 In the floor plan view, starting at the lower left corner of the wing, draw a selection box around the level 2 fire protection piping until just past the section line (don’t include the supply pipe or hose reel cabinet).

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 299

5 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 6 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Pipe Fittings and Pipes, and click OK. 7 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 1". 8 Click Modify. All selected piping is now 1" diameter.

Tag the pipes 9 In the floor plan view, zoom in to the right half of the wing (including the stairs). 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 11 Click to select a segment of pipe in the corridor. 12 If necessary, click Yes to load tags in the alert dialog, . 13 Navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Pipe Size Tag.rfa, and click Open. 14 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Verify that Horizontal is selected. Clear Leader.

15 Place the cursor over the pipe segments shown, and after each segment highlights, click to place the tag. The tags accurately display the size of the selected pipe segments.

NOTE Tags are view specific. They display only in the view in which they were placed. Press Esc.

300 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modify the diameter of the main 16 In the 3D view, select the linked architectural file. 17 On the View Control Bar, click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. By hiding the linked file, you isolate the piping to make it easier to select. 18 In the 3D view, select the vertical pipe below the hose cabinet.

19 Place the cursor over the section of main pipe feeding the last sprinkler, and when the section highlights, press Tab. This highlights the piping between the vertical pipe and the last segement. 20 Click to select the main piping between these points. The main piping is selected and displays in red.

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 301

for Diameter. 302 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .21 On the Options Bar. select 4". The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes.

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 303 . select the top segment of branch pipe in space Instruction 202 (next to the stairs). as shown. The pipe diameter is modified. Modify the diameter of branch pipes The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch. 23 Close the 3D view. and then tag the piping as shown. select 1 1/4". 26 Using the same method. change the diameter of the other top segments to 1 1/4" to accommodate sprinklers. and maximize the floor plan. for Diameter.22 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 24 In the drawing area. 25 On the Options Bar.

The completed fire protection system is included in the RME_FP_Design_06_i. 304 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ 05_Fire Protection Systems folder under Training Files.27 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. you created a wet fire protection system. For additional practice. In this exercise. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet system. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. In this tutorial. You learned how to manually change the diameter of a pipe. You added tags to pipes. and the difference between how the software sizes pipe and how to manually modify pipe diameter.

Documenting a Project In this tutorial. create details. 305 . and create schedules for construction documentation for a project. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to create views. add annotations and dimensions.

306 .

You learn to create: ■ ■ ■ ■ a duplicate plan view. 2 In the Project Browser. and apply a view template.Creating Documentation Views 13 In this lesson. and click Properties. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and click Rename. dependent views. click Training Files.rvt. Apply a view template 4 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You select Duplicate because only model elements are included in the original view. 307 . right-click Level 1. right-click Copy of Level 1.Design ➤ Floor Plans. callout views for a typical HVAC view and a detail view. 3 In the Rename View dialog. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. you begin the construction documentation for the building project. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click OK. You then change the properties of the new view by applying a view template. If the view included detail graphics. under Floor Plans. a plumbing isometric riser from a 3D design view. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_01_i. matchlines. you duplicate an existing floor plan view to create a duct plan view. and view references. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 duct plan 1 In the Project Browser. you’d select Duplicate with Detailing. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. Duplicate a view to create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. as shown. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. Creating Dependent Views Because large buildings cannot fit on a single sheet at 1/8" = 1' scale.rvt. This is useful when breaking up plans with varying geometries across levels.5 In the Instance Properties dialog. views and put them on the sheet. Create matchlines Matchlines are used with dependent views. you use dependent views to accommodate such large buildings. and click Rename. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. You can modify the visibility of matchlines in specific views. and then press Esc. The view is automatically updated with the defined graphical style. 4 Using the same method. and click Apply Default View Template. 5 Make sure Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is the active view. 6 Click View tab ➤ Sheet Composition panel ➤ Matchline. under Identity Data ➤ Default View Template. Dependent views keep the primary/parent view as the working drawing and allow you to create smaller. create dependent views for areas B and C. click to specify the first point of the matchline to the left of the plan and below gridline C. 9 Click OK. more focused. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click OK. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 308 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 10 In the drawing area. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_02_i. 6 In the Project Browser. to delineate splits in a large floor plan. and the floor plan is moved to its new location in the Project Browser hierarchy. and click OK. verify that the top and bottom constraints are Unlimited. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 7 Click Create Matchline Sketch tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Matchline Properties. The smaller (dependent) views inherit view properties and view-specific elements from the primary view. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. select HVAC Duct Plan-Documentation. 2 Right-click the dependent view title. click Training Files. You crop a dependent view to show only the area marked by the matchline. 11 Click beyond the exterior wall of the wing to specify the second point.

17 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. and click OK. apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B to the other view reference. 19 In the drawing area. select 11. Creating view references 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ View Reference. 20 Select the upper view reference and. for Target view. click the current value. click above and below the modified matchline to create view references (displayed as . Modify object styles 15 Zoom in to the left part of the upper matchline. Click OK. select Matchline: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Line Color. Creating Dependent Views | 309 . on the Options Bar. 13 Press Esc twice./ ---). 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. select Double Dash 5/8". For Line Weight.12 Draw a second matchline that spans the floor plan above gridline H. select Floor Plan: Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. For Line Pattern. 21 Using the same method. and then press Esc. select black. In the Color dialog. 14 Click Finish Matchline.

The view references in the primary view are automatically updated as the views are placed on sheets. as shown. and apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C to it. indicating the detail and sheet number of each view.22 Add a view reference below the lower matchline. 28 Make Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan the active view. 23 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. crop the dependent views for plans B and C. 310 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 27 Using the same method. Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C 26 Open Sheet M201. 24 Use the grips on the crop lines to modify the view boundaries. drag Plan_B onto Sheet M202 and Plan_C onto Sheet M203. 25 Using the same method. and drag Plan_A from the Project Browser onto the sheet. and zoom to each of the view references.

29 Close the file with or without saving it. and click Properties. 3 Click Modify Section Boxes tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. for View Classification. The section crop lines no longer display. you copy a 3D design view and modify it to create a 3D plumbing isometric riser for domestic water. right-click Copy of 3D Plumbing. right-click 3D Plumbing. for View Name.rvt. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing-Design ➤ 3D Views. select Plumbing. enter Plumbing Isometric . 8 Highlight a segment of the top horizontal piping. and click Apply Default View Template. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser In this exercise. select Documentation. and select the section box. Click OK. 6 In the Project Browser. 5 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_03_i.Domestic Water. press Tab twice to highlight the pipe run.Domestic Water. 7 Zoom in to the plumbing system. and click to select it. right-click Plumbing Isometric . In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Plumbing Isometric. For Sub-Discipline. You pin the view to keep it from being moved inadvertently. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 2 Zoom in. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 311 . Duplicate a view and specify properties 1 In the Project Browser. Under Graphics. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. For Default View Template. 4 In the Project Browser. click Training Files.

and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. 312 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . select Dash. change the line weight to 4 and the line pattern to Dash Dot 3/16". press Tab 3 times. select 3. For Pattern. Click Apply. and click to select it. and then click OK. 12 Using the same method. 11 Select the vertical segment of pipe coming off the tankless water heater. 10 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. The selected piping displays as a dashed line.9 Right-click.

Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 313 . and click Hide in View ➤ Elements. press Tab 3 times (until the entire pipe network highlights. This hides the sanitary piping in order to create a domestic water supply riser isometric view. and click to select it. as shown). 14 Right-click.13 Highlight a segment of horizontal pipe below the sinks.

and click Unhide in view ➤ Elements.15 Press Esc. highlight a segment of the sanitary piping. On the View Control Bar. and click to select it. ■ ■ ■ Hide domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping.Domestic Water view with detailing. click Reveal Hidden Elements. 18 Using methods learned previously. Right-click. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. create a sanitary riser isometric view: ■ Duplicate the Plumbing Isometric .Sanitary Waste. Unhide the sanitary waste piping: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the View Control Bar. press Tab 3 times. 314 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . Click in the drawing area to start a text label. and then click in empty space in the drawing to end the label. and rename the new view Plumbing Isometric . 17 Label the fixtures as shown. In the drawing area. click Close Reveal Hidden Elements. On the View Control Bar.

click on the Format value. for Rounding. and then place the callout view on a sheet. For Slope. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. 23 Click on the horizontal pipe below the sinks to select it. When the view is associated with a sheet. 25 Press Esc twice. as shown. Creating Callout Views | 315 . 22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Spot Slope. verify that Common is selected. and click to place the spot slope annotation. you use a plan view to create a callout view. the callout head on the original view is updated with the sheet information. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. 24 Move the cursor above the pipe. select To the nearest 1/8". 21 Click OK twice. In the Format dialog. 20 In the Project Units dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Discipline.Add a spot slope annotation 19 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Units.

Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. 316 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . for Scale. click Training Files. 4 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. 7 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ Select the callout boundary. 2 Zoom in to an office in Area C (the bottom section of the plan).Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and move it to the bottom right corner of the boundary. 5 On the Options Bar. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select 1/4"=1'-0''. beginning at the upper left and ending at the lower right. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is highlighted. indicating that it’s the active view. 6 Draw the callout around the ductwork as shown. and select Floor Plan from the Type Selector drop-down.rvt. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_04_i. Select the Drag Head control (the control on the leader line that is closest to the callout head).

Creating Callout Views | 317 . select Callout of Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. change the line weight for the Callout Leader Line to 5. double-click M601 .HVAC Duct Plan & Sections. 11 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ For the Callout Boundary category. drag it to the sheet. Modify callout boundary line weight 9 Press Esc to clear the selection. and click in the empty space at the top center to place it. under Sheets (all).8 Create an angled leader line by dragging the Drag control located at the center of the leader as shown. 13 In the Project Browser. Click OK. 10 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. using the same method. for Line Weight. ■ Place the view on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. select 5. ■ Expand the Callout Boundary category and.

17 In the Project Browser. enter Callout of Level 1 HVAC WSHP TYP. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. and select the viewport. for View Name. Ductwork in coarse detail 318 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . enter WSHP PART PLAN.Rename the detail view and modify view settings 14 Zoom to the callout view. The display of the ductwork changes from coarse detail to fine. For Title on Sheet. right-click the callout view. and click Apply Default View Template. 15 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. For Default View Template. Click OK.

20 Double-click the section head at the left of the stairs to open Room 214 Section. Creating Callout Views | 319 . The detail callout head has been updated with sheet information. 19 Zoom in to the area near the central stairs and section markers.Ductwork in fine detail Create a detail callout 18 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan.

28 In the Apply View Template dialog. and click OK. 23 Draw the callout boundary around the level 1 ductwork as shown. and select Detail from the Type Selector drop-down. right-click the detail view. and click Apply View Template. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. under Names. 22 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. The view is changed to a hidden line display and is moved to its new position in the Project Browser hierarchy. 25 In the Project Browser. 26 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK.21 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout.Design ➤ Detail Views (Detail). 320 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and click Rename. enter Typical WSHP Detail. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 27 Right-click Typical WSHP Detail. 29 Close the file with or without saving it. 24 Double-click the callout head to open the detail view.

and diffuser tags to an HVAC documentation plan. you learn how to: ■ add text notes. symbols. duct tags. and annotation to create a legend.Working with Annotations and Dimensions 14 In this lesson. ■ work with model-based components. ■ create permanent dimensions in a lighting plan so that you can control the location of specific fixtures. 321 . linetypes.

double-click Level 2 HVAC Duct Plan to make it the active view. as shown. 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans. 2 Zoom in to the offices in the lower right corner of the building in Area C. use the drag grips to modify the text box width and position it so that it doesn’t cross the ductwork or wall. Add a text note to an HVAC documentation plan 1 In the Project Browser.Creating Annotations In this exercise. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. you work with tag and leader types to create an annotated HVAC documentation plan. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_01_i. click Training Files. 8 With the text still selected. 7 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 5 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Center). 322 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 6 Click to start the text note in between 2 of the branch ducts serving the perimeter supply air grilles. and enter RUN DUCT THROUGH OPEN WEB JOISTS.

9 Press Esc twice. Use the leader segment grips to create horizontal leader segments from the text box. a segment of round duct. a return diffuser. Add diffuser and duct tags by category 14 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 15 On the Options Bar. select a supply diffuser. as shown. Creating Annotations | 323 . 13 Press Esc to clear the selection. 12 Use the leader end grips to drag the arrows to point to the 2 branch ducts. 16 In the drawing area. and a segment of rectangular duct. Add leaders 10 Select the text box. verify that Leader is cleared. and then click Right Straight. 11 Click Modify Text Notes tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Add Leader: Left Straight.

and click OK. verify that the Loaded Tag is Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. under Category. 17 Click Modify. clear Leader. select Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. for Ducts. 22 In the Tags dialog. move diffuser tags off the ductwork. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 24 On the Options Bar. 324 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . Place a loaded tag and modify its orientation In order to display additional information about an element. Load tags from library 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel drop-down ➤ Loaded Tags. click Load.rfa and Flex Duct Tag Round. tag the remaining diffusers in the area. Tag remaining diffusers 18 Using the same method. If necessary.The information on each tag varies according to the category of element. you can annotate the element with a second tag type. 21 In the Load Family dialog. 20 In the Tags dialog.rfa. and click Open. navigate to Annotations ➤ Duct.

30 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. and Attached End. Leader. 29 Zoom in to the piping near the stairs in the upper right corner of the building in Area A. select the large horizontal segment of rectangular duct and the round duct. as shown.25 In the drawing area. select the select the large pipe on the right as shown. 26 On the Options Bar. Creating Annotations | 325 . select Horizontal. Place tags with leaders 28 In the Project Browser. 27 Select the large segment of rectangular duct connected to the WSHP. 32 In the drawing area. open Documentation ➤ HVAC-Pipe ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan_A. specify Tag Orientation as Vertical. and then press Esc. 31 On the Options Bar.

as shown. for Leader. 34 In the drawing area. click the top horizontal pipe in the corridor. 35 Click above and to the right of the leader start point to place the leader as shown. 326 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . select Free End.33 On the Options Bar.

not simply an instance property. and click OK. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. 37 In the drawing area. select Dot Open 1/16". and all elements of that type are affected. Creating Dimensions | 327 . That’s because you changed a type property. and the tags placed previously have changed to the new style as well. for Leader Arrowhead. tag the bottom horizontal pipe as shown. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. you use temporary dimensions to locate.36 Press Esc twice. 38 Click Modify Pipe Tags tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. Edit a tag type You edit the type properties for the pipe size tag so that you can specify a different leader style. 40 Using the method learned previously. Notice that the new tags you place use the new style. and lock lighting fixtures. select the last tag placed. lay out.

328 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 9 Select the reference line at the center of the next fixture to the right. Continue the dimension string using the Edit Witness Lines feature 7 In the drawing area. drag the witness line on the right to the face of the wall on the left side of the selected lighting fixture.rvt. 4 Using the Move Witness Line control. select the dimension line. 3 Select the upper left lighting fixture. click Training Files. 10 Repeat for the remaining 2 top fixtures. On the Options Bar. 5 Click to create a permanent dimension. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_02_i.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 8 Click Modify Dimensions tab ➤ Witness Lines panel ➤ Edit Witness Lines. 12 Press Esc. and then select the interior face of the wall. You can modify the preferred condition for dimension face selection. Lay out lighting fixtures using temporary and permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan_A is highlighted. 11 Click in any empty space in the drawing area to finish. indicating that it’s the active view. notice that Prefer : Wall faces is selected. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. 2 Zoom in to the left side of the plan.

click the 3 interior locks on the line. 18 Select the dimension value (7' . 19 Using the same methods. Lock dimensions between fixtures 14 Select the center dimension line. annotation symbols. 16 Press Esc. the fixtures shift to maintain constraints. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.3 1/2"). 20 Close the file with or without saving it. and offset them 8' from the wall. Creating a Legend In this exercise. Creating a Legend | 329 . and press Enter. you create an HVAC Sheet Metal legend using model-based legend components. enter 8'. and notes. add dimension strings for the remaining 2 rows of lighting fixtures in the room. linework. 15 To lock the dimensions between the interior fixtures. Modify dimensions to offset fixtures 17 Select the right lighting fixture in the center line.13 Using the same method. Because the dimensions are locked. lock the dimensions of the interior fixtures for the remaining 2 rows.

and select 1/4" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. and enter DIFFUSER LEGEND. select Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . click below the title to place the diffuser. click Training Files. Create a legend title 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Add model element detail components 7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Legend Component. select Floor Plan. For View. 2 In the New Legend View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name.8 Neck.rvt. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_03_i. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ For Family. 10 Using the same method. Create a legend view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Legends drop-down ➤ Legend. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. place: ■ ■ ■ Air Terminals : Return Diffuser : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Exhaust Grill : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser .Sidewall : 18 x 8 330 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 6 Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. enter Diffuser Legend.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 . Click OK. For Scale. 5 Click in the drawing area. select 1/4" = 1' -0". ■ 9 In the drawing area.

13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel.11 Press Esc. and enter SUPPLY DIFFUSER. click next to the top diffuser. and select 1/8" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down list. 15 Using the same method and using the blue dashed reference lines for alignment. Creating a Legend | 331 . annotate the remaining components: ■ ■ ■ RETURN DIFFUSER EXHAUST GRILL SIDEWALL SUPPLY DIFFUSER 16 Click Modify. Add detail component text descriptions 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 14 In the drawing area.

27 While pressing Ctrl. and then click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . select Thin Lines from the Line Style drop-down. and then press Esc. 25 Select the center reference line as the mirror line. 20 Click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . 28 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel. select the top and bottom detail lines on the left side of the component.DROP symbol to specify the copy end point. 19 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 332 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . and click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror. 23 Delete the arrow and the left 3 lines at the center of the component. 22 Zoom in to the copied component. The selected detail lines are now thin. 18 Select the ELEVATION INCLINE . 21 Press Esc.RISE symbol for the copy start point.Create a legend symbol 17 In the Project Browser. 26 Press Esc. 29 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Symbol. open HVAC_SM_DUCT_CONDITION legend view. 24 Select the component’s break line.DROP and its text note.

and then click Modify. 33 Click to the left of the left break line. 35 Change the text on the right to N. enter E. mirror the text on the center reference line of the component. Creating a Legend | 333 . and then click Modify. 31 Click below the center of the bottom component to place the symbol. and then change the text note to CONNECT NEW DUCT TO EXISTING DUCT.30 Select Spot Elevation . double-click Sheets (all) ➤ M100 . 38 Drag Diffuser Legend from the Project Browser to the bottom of the sheet. Place legend views on a sheet 37 In the Project Browser. 32 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.MECHANICAL LEGEND.Target Filled from the Type Selector drop-down. 36 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. in the Ductwork-Sheet Metal column. 34 Using the method learned previously.

40 Press Esc. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. 334 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .39 With the viewport still selected. click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel.

A drafting detail by importing a CAD detail. 335 . A drafting view using detail components. Tag electrical panels 1 In the Project Browser. you will create: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A model-based detail of an electrical power riser diagram. detail groups. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. A 3D isometric detail view of a typical WSHP Make Up detail. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Power Plan ➤ Level 1 Power Plan_B is highlighted. A detail callout that references another view.Detailing 15 In this lesson. and text. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail In this exercise. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_01_i. click Training Files. you place elevation views on a sheet and then arrange them as a single view in preparation of creating a one-line diagram. 2 Double-click the right elevation head to open the Power Riser .113 East elevation view. indicating that it’s the active view.

and click to place it.113 East on the sheet. clear Leader. 4 On the Options Bar. Next. select each of the 2 panelboards. 8 Using the same method. Notice that the software displays a dashed line so that you can align the views as you place them. and then modify and align the views.113 North elevation view from the Project Browser to the empty area at the upper left of sheet E101. 7 Drag the Power Riser . Place views on a sheet 6 In the Project Browser. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . place Power Riser .3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 5 In the drawing area. Place the view close to the left edge of the sheet so that there is room in the same space for the east elevation view.Electrical Power Riser Diagram to make it the active view. 336 | Chapter 15 Detailing . you place both the North and East elevation views on a sheet.

and click Activate View. enter Electrical Power Riser Diagram. under Identity Data. 10 Zoom to the power riser elevations on the sheet. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail | 337 . select the 113 North view. and click Deactivate View. and click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. giving the appearance of a single view. Modify level lines 11 In the drawing area. right-click. and click OK. 13 Right-click. for Title on Sheet.9 Press Esc. and use the filled circle drag control on the right to drag the end of the level line to the right. Modify a viewport title 14 Select the title of the 113 North view. Doing this enables you to later drag the 113 East view to the left. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. 12 Select the Level 1 line.

right-click. select the 113 East elevation view.Remove a viewport title display 16 Select the 113 East view. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. You also create a detail group and annotate the diagram. Creating Detail Wiring In this exercise. 338 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Align elevation views to resemble a single view 18 In the drawing area. 21 Using the drag control. 20 Select the 113 East elevation view again. move the view to the left so that it overlaps the 113 North view. and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. as shown. and click Activate View. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. 17 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. 19 Select the Level 1 line. you use detail lines to create wiring for the one-line electrical riser diagram. right-click. you add wiring to the diagram. 22 Press Esc. In the next exercise. You combine views in order to create a one-line diagram.

enter Electrical Power. 2 Close the Project Browser. Creating Detail Wiring | 339 . As you draw.113 North view. and click OK. click Training Files. draw lines to represent the wiring to the switchboard (SWB).rvt. notice that there are no snaps active. 3 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Line Styles. click New. In the New Subcategory dialog. 4 In the Line Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. select 6. and select Electrical Power from the Type Selector drop-down. zoom in to the service transformer (T-SVC) located at the bottom left of the Power Riser . 7 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Element panel.Electrical Power Riser Diagram is highlighted.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Under Modify Subcategories. Zoom in as necessary and use the drag controls to make sure the lines clean up properly. as shown. 8 On the Options Bar. This maximizes the drawing window so that you can more easily add wiring to the riser diagram. indicating that it’s the active view. Draw linework to create a wiring diagram 5 In the drawing area. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_02_i. In the Line Styles dialog. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. verify that Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . verify that Chain is selected. for Line Weight. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Create a linetype 1 In the Project Browser. and then click OK. for Name. expand Lines. 9 Beginning at the transformer.

12 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. as shown. 13 On the Options Bar.10 Press Esc. 14 Click to place lines offset to the right and above the first 2 lines from the switchboard. for Offset. add lines to represent wiring between the switchboard and a panel on level 3 (MDP_3). 11 Using the same method. 340 | Chapter 15 Detailing . enter 1/8".

16 Draw a line to connect the offset line to MDP_2. 19 Select the horizontal line to the right of the first line. you select the portion of the line that you want to keep. 17 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. Creating Detail Wiring | 341 .15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. so that the result is as shown. TIP When you use the Trim tool. 18 Select the vertical detail line that connects into MDP_2 as the first line to trim.

21 Zoom in to panel MP-1B. Add a break symbol and note You create the break symbol and text note once. 342 | Chapter 15 Detailing .20 Continue adding detail lines until the diagram is wired as shown. and then copy them to multiple locations in the diagram.

25 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Creating Detail Wiring | 343 . and use the drag controls to resize the text box and position it as shown. 23 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Start-End-Radius Arc). 26 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ No Leader. The name of the detail arc (Start-End-Radius) indicates the order in which you select the defining points of the arc.22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. and then click Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Center). Copy the symbol and text 30 Select the text. 29 Click Modify. as shown. 28 Click above the cap. and select 3/32" Arial Transparent from the Type Selector drop-down. 24 Draw a “cap” (the break symbol) over the 3 vertical lines at the top of the panel. 27 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. and type SEE MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE.

select Multiple. select the text and the detail arc of the break symbol. 344 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 35 Click the endpoint of each of the corresponding lines for the other 2 mechanical panels (MP-2B and MP-3B) as the copy endpoints.31 While pressing Ctrl. 33 On the Options Bar. 32 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 34 Click the endpoint of the left vertical line under the break symbol as the copy start point.

37 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. enter 3/32". and then press Esc. 42 On the Options Bar. 40 Press Esc. 43 Click twice to place 2 more lines below the first line. for Offset. click to specify the start point of the first horizontal line. and press Enter.5. Creating Detail Wiring | 345 . enter 0 0. You enter exact values for each line length. 41 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. Create a ground wire You use 3 detail lines to create a ground wire symbol. 39 Move the cursor to the right. 38 Beginning below the level 1 switchboard.36 Press Esc.

Press Esc. Using the same method. while pressing Ctrl. enter Ground.125. and press Enter. change the length of the bottom line to 0 0. enter 0 0. and then press Esc. 46 In the Project Browser. Create a detail group By grouping the lines that represent the ground wire. expand Groups ➤ Detail.25. 50 With the group selected. and click OK. click on the length dimension value. 47 In the drawing area.44 Edit the offset lines: ■ ■ ■ Select the middle line. you can ensure that they stay together. select all 3 lines. 346 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Notice that the new Ground group displays in the Project Browser. 48 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Project Browser to open the browser view. for Name. You can also specify the origin point of the group so that it is placed accurately. drag the Modify Group Origin control to the midpoint of the top detail line. 49 In the Create Detail Group dialog.

51 Using the method learned previously. 53 Click the origin of the detail group as the move start point. TP-2B. 54 Select the group. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. 55 Click below each of the transformers (TP-1B. and then click the endpoint of the detail line as the move end point. 56 Draw a detail line to connect each ground wire group to its transformer. draw a detail line that extends from the bottom right of the switchboard. 52 Select the detail group. and TP-3B) to place the ground wire group in those locations. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. Creating Detail Wiring | 347 .

and click OK. 4 Right-click the ViewCube. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail In this exercise. 58 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. 5 Zoom in to view the section. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Duct & Equipment. and click Orient to View ➤ Sections ➤ Typical Make Up Air. 348 | Chapter 15 Detailing . you will create the Mechanical Connection Schedule referenced here.Pin wires and view You pin the view and all detail lines so that they don’t get moved accidentally. 57 Using a crossing window (beginning at lower left and extending to upper right). 3 In the Rename View dialog. You use a view template to isolate the mechanical components so that you can annotate the detail components. and click Rename. Prepare the view 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_03_i. select the entire Electrical Riser Power Diagram viewport. 59 Close the file with or without saving it. and will place it on sheet E01.rvt. 2 Right-click the copy. for Name. you duplicate an existing view and orient it to a section view in order to create an isometric detail view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. In later exercises.

and then press Esc. and then click the corner where the Top. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 349 .6 Select the section box. Back. and Left sides converge. 7 On the ViewCube. click Home. and drag the top grip down so that the section includes only the first floor.

and click Apply View Template. This isolates the mechanical components by turning off the architectural components. Click OK. 350 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Walkthroughs. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. You hide this duct because it’s not part of the detail being created. Annotate the view 11 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. 9 In the View Templates dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Show Type. right-click Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail.Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. 12 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. right-click. select 3D HVAC Iso. Under Names. Hide elements in a view 10 Select the long rectangular duct at the rear. select 3D Views.

Enter Makeup Air Duct from AHU-1. label the connecting duct 8x8 Makeup Air to Return Plenum (Provide Motorized Damper). Typical. click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: 18 Press Esc. 16 Select the text for the 8x8 duct. as shown. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 351 .14 Place the label: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click on the long rectangular duct to start the leader. and click to specify the second leader point. (Right). Move the cursor to the left and click to specify the text insertion point. Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 15 Using the same method. 19 Complete the text labels. Move the cursor down and to the left. and drag the controls to resize the text box as shown. Change text alignment 17 With the text still selected.

select Crop View and clear Crop Region Visible. select Crop Region Visible. type VP to open the instance properties for the view. and then click OK. as shown. Modify the view 20 In the drawing area. and under Extents. select the label and use the Drag and Rotate controls that display. 23 Click on the crop region. 26 Zoom to the drawing extents. Place the view on a sheet 27 In the Project Browser. and use the drag controls to position the boundaries around the detail. 28 Drag the new isometric view from the Project Browser onto the sheet. 352 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 25 Click OK. 24 Access the instance properties for the view. under Extents.To rotate and reposition a text label. 22 Zoom out so that the isometric detail and the crop region are both visible. open Sheets (all) ➤ M601-HVAC DUCT PLAN & SECTIONS. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog.

Drafting Detail Components In this exercise. select 3" = 1'-0". you can more accurately locate the view in the Project Browser hierarchy. 3 In the Project Browser. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view. right-click the view name. enter Typical Floor Drain Detail. Work with a filled region that represents a detail component. Drafting Detail Components | 353 . 2 In the New Drafting View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_04_i. select the isometric view. Click OK. Place a detail component. By defining a Sub-Discipline and a View Classification. Annotate the drafting view using keynotes and text notes.rvt. For Scale. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Use detail lines to create a detail group.29 In the drawing area. Create a drafting view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Drafting View. and then select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. The new view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). and click Properties. 30 Close the file with or without saving it.

Use a filled region to create a concrete slab 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Region drop-down ➤ Region. click the point at the top of the drain. 8 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. for Sub-Discipline. 13 In the drawing area. select Documentation. 9 Zoom in to the component. 12 On the Element panel. select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. select Plumbing. 14 Drag the cursor down and to the left so that the rectangle is 1' 8" x 5 1/2".4 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. 354 | Chapter 15 Detailing . as the rectangle start point. Place a floor drain detail component 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. as shown. Notice the new location of the view in the Project Browser. 6 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Element panel. 7 Click in the middle of the drawing area to place the component. For View Classification. and select Floor Drain with Waterproofing-Section from the Type Selector drop-down. 11 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle). Click OK.

select C.5 NR 18 from the Type Selector drop-down. 21 In the drawing area. 20 Select 1. click to select the indicated points in succession from left to right to define the new boundary. select the filled region. click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Arrange ➤ Send to Back drop-down ➤ Send to Back.P. (Line).15 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Region Properties.I. Drafting Detail Components | 355 . 18 With the filled region still selected. 23 In the drawing area. Modify the boundary of the filled region You edit the boundary of the concrete slab so that it matches the contour of the metal deck. 27 Using the following illustration as a guide. 17 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Region panel ➤ Finish Region. 22 Click Modify. click the bottom left corner of the filled region to specify the group insertion point. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog. Add a structural metal deck detail group 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Group drop-down ➤ Place Detail Group. 24 Click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Edit Boundary. and then press Esc. and click OK. for Type. Concrete. 25 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 26 Zoom to the lower left corner of the filled region.

select Multiple. 356 | Chapter 15 Detailing . press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. and then select the base of the slab to the right of the line. 30 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 32 Click point 1 to specify it as the start point. 35 Draw a line from the end of the last copied boundary line down to the base of the slab. 37 Select the small vertical line you just drew. and then click point 6 as the endpoint. and then click to select them. 29 Highlight one of the lines you just drew.28 Click Modify. 31 On the Options Bar. 34 Press Esc. 36 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. 33 Click the endpoint of the copied chain as the start point for the next chain.

as shown. Drafting Detail Components | 357 . 40 Click Finish Region. 44 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ This represents the vinyl composition flooring. (Rectangle). 43 Select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. The boundary of the slab now matches the contour of the metal deck.38 Pan to the other end of the slab. Create a floor component 42 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. and then press Esc. 39 Select the line between points 1 and 2. 45 Using the method learned previously. 41 Type ZF to zoom out. and then select the side of the slab above the line. draw a rectangle on top of the filled region.

D. 358 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 49 Click Modify. 48 Using the existing thin line as a guide. 51 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. enter Flashing Membrane_F. 54 Drag the origin point so that it snaps to the right endpoint of the detail lines. press Tab to highlight the chain. Modify the group origin point 53 In the drawing area. 50 Highlight one of the wide lines. select the Flashing Membrane group.Create a detail group 46 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. as shown. and click OK. 52 In the Create Group dialog. draw wide detail lines as shown. 47 Select Wide Lines from the Line Style drop-down. Notice that the origin point of the group is at the center.. and then click to select them. for Name.

as shown. Add breaklines 56 Type ZO to zoom out. 57 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component.55 Press Esc. 61 Using the same method. Drafting Detail Components | 359 . 59 Press Spacebar 3 times to orient the component correctly. 58 Select Break Line from the Type Selector drop-down. 60 Click the midpoint of the drain to specify the breakline location. add a breakline at the midpoint of the slab’s left edge.

64 Press Esc twice. and use the grips to resize the masking region. select the keynote and drag the text to the right. and then click OK. 360 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 68 Select the top of the drain as the object to tag. select Division 22 ➤ 22 13 00 ➤ 22 13 16 ➤ 22 13 16. 66 Select Keynote Text from the Type Selector drop-down. Add a keynote You begin annotating the detail components by adding a keynote for the floor drain object. 70 In the Keynotes dialog. select Leader and Free End.62 Press Esc twice. 69 Click twice to place the leader as shown. 65 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Keynote drop-down ➤ User. 72 If necessary. 71 Click Modify. Modify breakline boundaries 63 Select the left breakline. as shown.A1 Floor Drain W/O Waterproofing. 67 On the Options Bar.

77 Move the cursor up and to the left. 76 To select the leader start point. and click to specify the text insertion point. Drafting Detail Components | 361 . 73 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 79 Enter Adjustable Nickel Bronze Strainer with 4” Flange. 78 Move the cursor to the left. and click to specify the second leader point. and then click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 74 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. click in the area indicated by the left arrow in the following image. 75 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Right). 80 Press Esc twice. 81 Select the text note. and use the drag controls to resize and move the text box as shown.Add text notes You add text notes to continue annotating the view.

Add dimensions You add a dimension with multiple references. 83 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. 84 Using the following image as a guide. as shown.82 Continue annotating the detail. 362 | Chapter 15 Detailing . click to select the slab lines in the order indicated.

Plumbing Part Plans & Details. and click to place it. 91 Close the file with or without saving it. Drafting Detail Components | 363 . select the view title. 89 Select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. 88 In the drawing area. and then press Esc twice. open P103 . 87 Drag Typical Floor Drain Detail from the Project Browser to the top center of the sheet. Place the detail on a sheet 86 In the Project Browser.85 Click to the left of the slab to place the dimension line. 90 Press Esc.

7 On the Imported Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. Modify the CAD drawing line weight 5 Zoom to the left side of the detail. 6 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. ■ ■ ■ ■ 4 Type ZF to zoom the view. select Black and White. for Line Weight. expand Roof Drains Overflow Imperial. select 3. For A-----NPP. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 364 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select Auto-Detect.rvt. For Layers. you import a CAD detail drawing. and select Roof Drain Overflow Imperial. click Training Files. For Import units. 2 Click Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Import CAD. select Visible.dwg. Click Open.Importing a CAD Drawing In this exercise. Import a CAD detail drawing 1 In the Project Browser. For Colors. double-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Plumbing ➤ Drafting Views (Detail) ➤ Roof Drain Overflow Detail to make it the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Click OK. 3 In the Import CAD Formats dialog: ■ Navigate to Training\Imperial\06_Construction Documentation. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_05_i. and modify line weight properties in the imported drawing.

8 Type ZF.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. 10 Drag Roof Drain Overflow Detail from the Project Browser to the upper right of the sheet. and then press Esc. Importing a CAD Drawing | 365 . select the viewport title. 13 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. Place the detail on a sheet 9 In the Project Browser. 14 Drag the title to the small space below the viewport. 12 In the drawing area. 15 Close the file with or without saving it. open P103 . and select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. 11 Press Esc.

366 .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful